MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR...

84
1 MANUAL May be covered by one or more of the following: U.S. Patents #4538297, 4647876, 4696044, 4745309, 4881047, 4893099, 5124657, 5263091, 5268527, 5319713, 5333201, 5402498 and 5493617. Other patents pending. Foreign patents pending. WITH

Transcript of MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR...

Page 1: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

1

MANUALMay be covered by one or more of the following US Patents

4538297 4647876 4696044 4745309 4881047 4893099 5124657 5263091 5268527 5319713 5333201 5402498 and 5493617

Other patents pending Foreign patents pending

WITH

2

Your UTOPIA G200B has been designed to comply with the following Standards and Directives as set forth by the European Union

Council Directive(s) 89336EEC 7323EEC 76769EC 199462EC 2000 53EC 200295EC

Standard(s) EN55022 EN50082-1 EN60065

This means that this product has been designed to meet stringent guidelines on how much RF energy it can emit and that it should be immune from other sources of interference when properly used Improper use of this equipment could result in increased RF emissions which may or may not interfere with other electronic products

To insure against this possibility always use good shielded cables for all audio input and output connections This will help insure compliance with the Directive(s)

Copyright copy 2007 GHS CorporationAll rights reserved

3

CONTENTS1 Introduction 42 Quick Reference 73 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels 94 Connections 145 Operating Format 23

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Description 24 1048697 GLOBAL Function 25 1048697 MIXER Function 26 1048697 PR EAMP Function 26 1048697 HUSHreg Function 28 1048697 SPEAKER Simulator Function 29 1048697 COMPR ESSOR Function 30 1048697 WAH-WAH Function 31 1048697 PHASER Function 32 1048697 MODULATION EFX Function 33 1048697 CHOR US Function 34 1048697 FLAN GER Function 36 1048697 TR EMOLO Function 37 1048697 PITCH SHIFT Function 38 1048697 PITCH SHIFT IN TER VALS 39 1048697 DELAY Function 40 1048697 TAP QUAN TIZIN G Function 42 1048697 R EVER B Function 43 1048697 BAN SHEE TALKBOX Function 44

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams 45 1048697 Chor us Flanger and Pitch Shift 45 1048697 Tr emolo 46 1048697 Function and Par ameter r ange list 47

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B 50 1048697 Display Descr iption 50 1048697 Selecting a pr eset 51 1048697 Pr eset Banks 52 1048697 Changing pr eset par ameter s 53 1048697 Stor ing changed pr eset par ameter s 54 1048697 Oper ation Mod e 56 1048697 Selecting a Mod ulation Effect 57 1048697 MUTETUN ER Function 58 1048697 USB Connection 60 1048697 MIDI IN 60 1048697 MIDI OUTTHR U 60 1048697 MIDI Channels - Mid i R eceive 61 1048697 MIDI Channels - Mid i Tr ansmit 62 1048697 Pr ogr am Changes 63 1048697 MIDI DUMPLOAD 64 1048697 Ped al Contr oller s 66 1048697 Ped al Status 70 1048697 Footswitch Mapping 73 1048697 Factor y R estor e 75 1048697 Title Ed it Function 77 1048697 Selecting a Power on Pr eset 79

9Specifications 8010 UTOPIA G200B Preset Listing 81

4

1 IntroductionUTOPIAG200BPR OVIDESPR OFESSION ALSOUN DFOR GUITAR Rocktronrsquos Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and effects process-ing with the added Banshee Talkbox The G200B is packed with great sounds ready to transform any guitar amplifier intoaPower houseofR ockAnewfeatur epr eviously unavailableinmulti-effectsfloor processing is the inclusion of the world famous Rocktron Banshee Talkbox Unlike other talkboxes the G200B talkbox allows for digital distortion and effects to be used with the talkbox effect allowing you to create new talkbox tones and sounds Simply put the G200B between you and your amp and let your inspir ationflowR ocktr onstand salonewithamazingtonegener ationand effectsintheG200B-ev-er y thingy ouneed tocr eatey our ownsignatur esound and d efineanewgener ationofplay ingPlay inUtopiawher ethefutur eisamazing

Motorola is a trademark of Motorola Corporation HUSH and Basnshee are registered trademarks of GHS Corporation iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc

1048697 Gr eatTone1048697 128Fully pr ogr ammablepr esets1048697 R ocktr onsBansheeTalkboxbuilt-in1048697 Chor us R ever b Delay PitchShift Flanger Phaser and Tr emolo1048697 Easy topr ogr amuser contr ols1048697 UpDownpr esetBankby 3withinstantr ecallbuttons1048697 2nd mod ewith3instantaccesscontr oller switches1048697 Tapd elay notequantization116 18 tr iplet frac14 frac12and whole1048697 Illuminated noiselessfootswitches1048697 Glowinthed ar kmar kingsonped alboar d 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstate-of-the-ar tHUSHnoiser ed uction1048697 Onboar d pr o-gr ad eexpr essionped alwithintegr ated footswitchand LED1048697 Upgr ad ablecor epr ocessinghar d war ed esign[DSPCAR Dand CODECCAR D]1048697 Motor ola[Fr eescale]DSPenginewithAKMconver ter s1048697 Easy tor ead 2linecoolblueLCDd isplay 1048697 USBaud ior ecor d ingand play backconnectivity 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstateofthear tSpeaker Simulator for r ecor d ingand livesound 1048697 MIDIIN and MIDIOUTTHR U1048697 Auxiliar y CDMp3iPod in18jack1048697 Ster eohead phoneout1048697 Built-intuner 1048697 FullBand wid theffects1048697 R ugged pr ofessionalgr ad echassisand expr essionped almad efr ommetal1048697 AssignableEffectOnOff1048697 Power supply includ ed

5

PRECAUTIONS

NOTEITISVER Y IMPOR TAN TTHATY OUR EADTHISSECTION TOPR O-VIDEY EAR SOFTR OUBLEFR EEUSETHISUN ITR EQUIR ESCAR EFULHAN -DLING

bullAllwar ningsonthisequipmentand intheoper atinginstr uctionsshould beadhered to and all operating instructions should be followed

bullDonotusethisequipmentnear water Car eshould betakensothatobjectsdo not fall and liquids are not spilled into the unit through any openings

bull Thepower cor d ad apter should beunplugged fr omtheoutletwhenleftunused for a long period of time

bullDonotblockany ventilationopenings(ifapplicable)Installinaccor -dance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions

bullDonotinstallnear any heatsour cessuchasr ad iator s heatr egister s stovesor other appar atus(includ ingamplifier s)thatpr od uceheat

bullOnly used attachmentsaccessor iesspecified by themanufactur er

bullDonotusethispr od uctwithany case stand tr ipod br acketor tablethatisnotspecified by themanufactur er Insur ethatthecase stand tr ipod br acketetcispr oper ly ad justed and setup(followallinstr uctions)Extr acar eand cautionshould betakentoavoid tipover and injur y

bullUnplugthisappar atusd ur inglightningstor msor whenunused d ur inglongperiods of time

R efer allser vicetoqualified ser viceper sonnelSer vicingisr equir ed whentheappar atushasbeend amaged inany way suchaspower supply or plugisd amaged liquid hasbeenspilled or objectshavefallen into the apparatus or if the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor-mally or has been dropped

DON OTATTEMPTTOSER VICETHISEQUIPMEN TTHISEQUIPMEN TSHOULDBESER VICEDBY QUALIFIEDPER SON N ELON LY DON OTMAKEANY INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS OR ADDITIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT AT ANY TIME DO NOT TAMPER WITH INTERNAL ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ATAN Y TIMEFAILUR ETOFOLLOWTHESEIN STR UCTION SMAY VOIDTHEWAR R AN TY OFTHISEQUIPMEN T ASWELLASCAUSIN GSHOCKHAZAR D

OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Do not expose this unit to excessive heat This unit is designed to operate between 32deg F and 104deg F (0deg C and 40deg C) This unit may not function properly under extreme temperatures

6

WAR N IN G

The internal driver of the Utopia G200B Banshee trade Talkbox is capable of produc-ing extremely high sound pressure levels Because of this the vinyl talkbox tube supplied withtheG200Bshould N EVER be placed near any personrsquos ear Failure to use caution andor ear protection when using this product may result in perma-nent hearing impairment or hearing loss The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this product

Due to health issues the vinyl tube sup-plied with the unit cannot be returned to the factory or dealer

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 2: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

2

Your UTOPIA G200B has been designed to comply with the following Standards and Directives as set forth by the European Union

Council Directive(s) 89336EEC 7323EEC 76769EC 199462EC 2000 53EC 200295EC

Standard(s) EN55022 EN50082-1 EN60065

This means that this product has been designed to meet stringent guidelines on how much RF energy it can emit and that it should be immune from other sources of interference when properly used Improper use of this equipment could result in increased RF emissions which may or may not interfere with other electronic products

To insure against this possibility always use good shielded cables for all audio input and output connections This will help insure compliance with the Directive(s)

Copyright copy 2007 GHS CorporationAll rights reserved

3

CONTENTS1 Introduction 42 Quick Reference 73 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels 94 Connections 145 Operating Format 23

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Description 24 1048697 GLOBAL Function 25 1048697 MIXER Function 26 1048697 PR EAMP Function 26 1048697 HUSHreg Function 28 1048697 SPEAKER Simulator Function 29 1048697 COMPR ESSOR Function 30 1048697 WAH-WAH Function 31 1048697 PHASER Function 32 1048697 MODULATION EFX Function 33 1048697 CHOR US Function 34 1048697 FLAN GER Function 36 1048697 TR EMOLO Function 37 1048697 PITCH SHIFT Function 38 1048697 PITCH SHIFT IN TER VALS 39 1048697 DELAY Function 40 1048697 TAP QUAN TIZIN G Function 42 1048697 R EVER B Function 43 1048697 BAN SHEE TALKBOX Function 44

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams 45 1048697 Chor us Flanger and Pitch Shift 45 1048697 Tr emolo 46 1048697 Function and Par ameter r ange list 47

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B 50 1048697 Display Descr iption 50 1048697 Selecting a pr eset 51 1048697 Pr eset Banks 52 1048697 Changing pr eset par ameter s 53 1048697 Stor ing changed pr eset par ameter s 54 1048697 Oper ation Mod e 56 1048697 Selecting a Mod ulation Effect 57 1048697 MUTETUN ER Function 58 1048697 USB Connection 60 1048697 MIDI IN 60 1048697 MIDI OUTTHR U 60 1048697 MIDI Channels - Mid i R eceive 61 1048697 MIDI Channels - Mid i Tr ansmit 62 1048697 Pr ogr am Changes 63 1048697 MIDI DUMPLOAD 64 1048697 Ped al Contr oller s 66 1048697 Ped al Status 70 1048697 Footswitch Mapping 73 1048697 Factor y R estor e 75 1048697 Title Ed it Function 77 1048697 Selecting a Power on Pr eset 79

9Specifications 8010 UTOPIA G200B Preset Listing 81

4

1 IntroductionUTOPIAG200BPR OVIDESPR OFESSION ALSOUN DFOR GUITAR Rocktronrsquos Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and effects process-ing with the added Banshee Talkbox The G200B is packed with great sounds ready to transform any guitar amplifier intoaPower houseofR ockAnewfeatur epr eviously unavailableinmulti-effectsfloor processing is the inclusion of the world famous Rocktron Banshee Talkbox Unlike other talkboxes the G200B talkbox allows for digital distortion and effects to be used with the talkbox effect allowing you to create new talkbox tones and sounds Simply put the G200B between you and your amp and let your inspir ationflowR ocktr onstand salonewithamazingtonegener ationand effectsintheG200B-ev-er y thingy ouneed tocr eatey our ownsignatur esound and d efineanewgener ationofplay ingPlay inUtopiawher ethefutur eisamazing

Motorola is a trademark of Motorola Corporation HUSH and Basnshee are registered trademarks of GHS Corporation iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc

1048697 Gr eatTone1048697 128Fully pr ogr ammablepr esets1048697 R ocktr onsBansheeTalkboxbuilt-in1048697 Chor us R ever b Delay PitchShift Flanger Phaser and Tr emolo1048697 Easy topr ogr amuser contr ols1048697 UpDownpr esetBankby 3withinstantr ecallbuttons1048697 2nd mod ewith3instantaccesscontr oller switches1048697 Tapd elay notequantization116 18 tr iplet frac14 frac12and whole1048697 Illuminated noiselessfootswitches1048697 Glowinthed ar kmar kingsonped alboar d 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstate-of-the-ar tHUSHnoiser ed uction1048697 Onboar d pr o-gr ad eexpr essionped alwithintegr ated footswitchand LED1048697 Upgr ad ablecor epr ocessinghar d war ed esign[DSPCAR Dand CODECCAR D]1048697 Motor ola[Fr eescale]DSPenginewithAKMconver ter s1048697 Easy tor ead 2linecoolblueLCDd isplay 1048697 USBaud ior ecor d ingand play backconnectivity 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstateofthear tSpeaker Simulator for r ecor d ingand livesound 1048697 MIDIIN and MIDIOUTTHR U1048697 Auxiliar y CDMp3iPod in18jack1048697 Ster eohead phoneout1048697 Built-intuner 1048697 FullBand wid theffects1048697 R ugged pr ofessionalgr ad echassisand expr essionped almad efr ommetal1048697 AssignableEffectOnOff1048697 Power supply includ ed

5

PRECAUTIONS

NOTEITISVER Y IMPOR TAN TTHATY OUR EADTHISSECTION TOPR O-VIDEY EAR SOFTR OUBLEFR EEUSETHISUN ITR EQUIR ESCAR EFULHAN -DLING

bullAllwar ningsonthisequipmentand intheoper atinginstr uctionsshould beadhered to and all operating instructions should be followed

bullDonotusethisequipmentnear water Car eshould betakensothatobjectsdo not fall and liquids are not spilled into the unit through any openings

bull Thepower cor d ad apter should beunplugged fr omtheoutletwhenleftunused for a long period of time

bullDonotblockany ventilationopenings(ifapplicable)Installinaccor -dance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions

bullDonotinstallnear any heatsour cessuchasr ad iator s heatr egister s stovesor other appar atus(includ ingamplifier s)thatpr od uceheat

bullOnly used attachmentsaccessor iesspecified by themanufactur er

bullDonotusethispr od uctwithany case stand tr ipod br acketor tablethatisnotspecified by themanufactur er Insur ethatthecase stand tr ipod br acketetcispr oper ly ad justed and setup(followallinstr uctions)Extr acar eand cautionshould betakentoavoid tipover and injur y

bullUnplugthisappar atusd ur inglightningstor msor whenunused d ur inglongperiods of time

R efer allser vicetoqualified ser viceper sonnelSer vicingisr equir ed whentheappar atushasbeend amaged inany way suchaspower supply or plugisd amaged liquid hasbeenspilled or objectshavefallen into the apparatus or if the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor-mally or has been dropped

DON OTATTEMPTTOSER VICETHISEQUIPMEN TTHISEQUIPMEN TSHOULDBESER VICEDBY QUALIFIEDPER SON N ELON LY DON OTMAKEANY INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS OR ADDITIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT AT ANY TIME DO NOT TAMPER WITH INTERNAL ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ATAN Y TIMEFAILUR ETOFOLLOWTHESEIN STR UCTION SMAY VOIDTHEWAR R AN TY OFTHISEQUIPMEN T ASWELLASCAUSIN GSHOCKHAZAR D

OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Do not expose this unit to excessive heat This unit is designed to operate between 32deg F and 104deg F (0deg C and 40deg C) This unit may not function properly under extreme temperatures

6

WAR N IN G

The internal driver of the Utopia G200B Banshee trade Talkbox is capable of produc-ing extremely high sound pressure levels Because of this the vinyl talkbox tube supplied withtheG200Bshould N EVER be placed near any personrsquos ear Failure to use caution andor ear protection when using this product may result in perma-nent hearing impairment or hearing loss The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this product

Due to health issues the vinyl tube sup-plied with the unit cannot be returned to the factory or dealer

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 3: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

3

CONTENTS1 Introduction 42 Quick Reference 73 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels 94 Connections 145 Operating Format 23

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Description 24 1048697 GLOBAL Function 25 1048697 MIXER Function 26 1048697 PR EAMP Function 26 1048697 HUSHreg Function 28 1048697 SPEAKER Simulator Function 29 1048697 COMPR ESSOR Function 30 1048697 WAH-WAH Function 31 1048697 PHASER Function 32 1048697 MODULATION EFX Function 33 1048697 CHOR US Function 34 1048697 FLAN GER Function 36 1048697 TR EMOLO Function 37 1048697 PITCH SHIFT Function 38 1048697 PITCH SHIFT IN TER VALS 39 1048697 DELAY Function 40 1048697 TAP QUAN TIZIN G Function 42 1048697 R EVER B Function 43 1048697 BAN SHEE TALKBOX Function 44

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams 45 1048697 Chor us Flanger and Pitch Shift 45 1048697 Tr emolo 46 1048697 Function and Par ameter r ange list 47

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B 50 1048697 Display Descr iption 50 1048697 Selecting a pr eset 51 1048697 Pr eset Banks 52 1048697 Changing pr eset par ameter s 53 1048697 Stor ing changed pr eset par ameter s 54 1048697 Oper ation Mod e 56 1048697 Selecting a Mod ulation Effect 57 1048697 MUTETUN ER Function 58 1048697 USB Connection 60 1048697 MIDI IN 60 1048697 MIDI OUTTHR U 60 1048697 MIDI Channels - Mid i R eceive 61 1048697 MIDI Channels - Mid i Tr ansmit 62 1048697 Pr ogr am Changes 63 1048697 MIDI DUMPLOAD 64 1048697 Ped al Contr oller s 66 1048697 Ped al Status 70 1048697 Footswitch Mapping 73 1048697 Factor y R estor e 75 1048697 Title Ed it Function 77 1048697 Selecting a Power on Pr eset 79

9Specifications 8010 UTOPIA G200B Preset Listing 81

4

1 IntroductionUTOPIAG200BPR OVIDESPR OFESSION ALSOUN DFOR GUITAR Rocktronrsquos Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and effects process-ing with the added Banshee Talkbox The G200B is packed with great sounds ready to transform any guitar amplifier intoaPower houseofR ockAnewfeatur epr eviously unavailableinmulti-effectsfloor processing is the inclusion of the world famous Rocktron Banshee Talkbox Unlike other talkboxes the G200B talkbox allows for digital distortion and effects to be used with the talkbox effect allowing you to create new talkbox tones and sounds Simply put the G200B between you and your amp and let your inspir ationflowR ocktr onstand salonewithamazingtonegener ationand effectsintheG200B-ev-er y thingy ouneed tocr eatey our ownsignatur esound and d efineanewgener ationofplay ingPlay inUtopiawher ethefutur eisamazing

Motorola is a trademark of Motorola Corporation HUSH and Basnshee are registered trademarks of GHS Corporation iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc

1048697 Gr eatTone1048697 128Fully pr ogr ammablepr esets1048697 R ocktr onsBansheeTalkboxbuilt-in1048697 Chor us R ever b Delay PitchShift Flanger Phaser and Tr emolo1048697 Easy topr ogr amuser contr ols1048697 UpDownpr esetBankby 3withinstantr ecallbuttons1048697 2nd mod ewith3instantaccesscontr oller switches1048697 Tapd elay notequantization116 18 tr iplet frac14 frac12and whole1048697 Illuminated noiselessfootswitches1048697 Glowinthed ar kmar kingsonped alboar d 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstate-of-the-ar tHUSHnoiser ed uction1048697 Onboar d pr o-gr ad eexpr essionped alwithintegr ated footswitchand LED1048697 Upgr ad ablecor epr ocessinghar d war ed esign[DSPCAR Dand CODECCAR D]1048697 Motor ola[Fr eescale]DSPenginewithAKMconver ter s1048697 Easy tor ead 2linecoolblueLCDd isplay 1048697 USBaud ior ecor d ingand play backconnectivity 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstateofthear tSpeaker Simulator for r ecor d ingand livesound 1048697 MIDIIN and MIDIOUTTHR U1048697 Auxiliar y CDMp3iPod in18jack1048697 Ster eohead phoneout1048697 Built-intuner 1048697 FullBand wid theffects1048697 R ugged pr ofessionalgr ad echassisand expr essionped almad efr ommetal1048697 AssignableEffectOnOff1048697 Power supply includ ed

5

PRECAUTIONS

NOTEITISVER Y IMPOR TAN TTHATY OUR EADTHISSECTION TOPR O-VIDEY EAR SOFTR OUBLEFR EEUSETHISUN ITR EQUIR ESCAR EFULHAN -DLING

bullAllwar ningsonthisequipmentand intheoper atinginstr uctionsshould beadhered to and all operating instructions should be followed

bullDonotusethisequipmentnear water Car eshould betakensothatobjectsdo not fall and liquids are not spilled into the unit through any openings

bull Thepower cor d ad apter should beunplugged fr omtheoutletwhenleftunused for a long period of time

bullDonotblockany ventilationopenings(ifapplicable)Installinaccor -dance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions

bullDonotinstallnear any heatsour cessuchasr ad iator s heatr egister s stovesor other appar atus(includ ingamplifier s)thatpr od uceheat

bullOnly used attachmentsaccessor iesspecified by themanufactur er

bullDonotusethispr od uctwithany case stand tr ipod br acketor tablethatisnotspecified by themanufactur er Insur ethatthecase stand tr ipod br acketetcispr oper ly ad justed and setup(followallinstr uctions)Extr acar eand cautionshould betakentoavoid tipover and injur y

bullUnplugthisappar atusd ur inglightningstor msor whenunused d ur inglongperiods of time

R efer allser vicetoqualified ser viceper sonnelSer vicingisr equir ed whentheappar atushasbeend amaged inany way suchaspower supply or plugisd amaged liquid hasbeenspilled or objectshavefallen into the apparatus or if the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor-mally or has been dropped

DON OTATTEMPTTOSER VICETHISEQUIPMEN TTHISEQUIPMEN TSHOULDBESER VICEDBY QUALIFIEDPER SON N ELON LY DON OTMAKEANY INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS OR ADDITIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT AT ANY TIME DO NOT TAMPER WITH INTERNAL ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ATAN Y TIMEFAILUR ETOFOLLOWTHESEIN STR UCTION SMAY VOIDTHEWAR R AN TY OFTHISEQUIPMEN T ASWELLASCAUSIN GSHOCKHAZAR D

OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Do not expose this unit to excessive heat This unit is designed to operate between 32deg F and 104deg F (0deg C and 40deg C) This unit may not function properly under extreme temperatures

6

WAR N IN G

The internal driver of the Utopia G200B Banshee trade Talkbox is capable of produc-ing extremely high sound pressure levels Because of this the vinyl talkbox tube supplied withtheG200Bshould N EVER be placed near any personrsquos ear Failure to use caution andor ear protection when using this product may result in perma-nent hearing impairment or hearing loss The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this product

Due to health issues the vinyl tube sup-plied with the unit cannot be returned to the factory or dealer

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 4: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

4

1 IntroductionUTOPIAG200BPR OVIDESPR OFESSION ALSOUN DFOR GUITAR Rocktronrsquos Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and effects process-ing with the added Banshee Talkbox The G200B is packed with great sounds ready to transform any guitar amplifier intoaPower houseofR ockAnewfeatur epr eviously unavailableinmulti-effectsfloor processing is the inclusion of the world famous Rocktron Banshee Talkbox Unlike other talkboxes the G200B talkbox allows for digital distortion and effects to be used with the talkbox effect allowing you to create new talkbox tones and sounds Simply put the G200B between you and your amp and let your inspir ationflowR ocktr onstand salonewithamazingtonegener ationand effectsintheG200B-ev-er y thingy ouneed tocr eatey our ownsignatur esound and d efineanewgener ationofplay ingPlay inUtopiawher ethefutur eisamazing

Motorola is a trademark of Motorola Corporation HUSH and Basnshee are registered trademarks of GHS Corporation iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc

1048697 Gr eatTone1048697 128Fully pr ogr ammablepr esets1048697 R ocktr onsBansheeTalkboxbuilt-in1048697 Chor us R ever b Delay PitchShift Flanger Phaser and Tr emolo1048697 Easy topr ogr amuser contr ols1048697 UpDownpr esetBankby 3withinstantr ecallbuttons1048697 2nd mod ewith3instantaccesscontr oller switches1048697 Tapd elay notequantization116 18 tr iplet frac14 frac12and whole1048697 Illuminated noiselessfootswitches1048697 Glowinthed ar kmar kingsonped alboar d 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstate-of-the-ar tHUSHnoiser ed uction1048697 Onboar d pr o-gr ad eexpr essionped alwithintegr ated footswitchand LED1048697 Upgr ad ablecor epr ocessinghar d war ed esign[DSPCAR Dand CODECCAR D]1048697 Motor ola[Fr eescale]DSPenginewithAKMconver ter s1048697 Easy tor ead 2linecoolblueLCDd isplay 1048697 USBaud ior ecor d ingand play backconnectivity 1048697 R ocktr onrsquosstateofthear tSpeaker Simulator for r ecor d ingand livesound 1048697 MIDIIN and MIDIOUTTHR U1048697 Auxiliar y CDMp3iPod in18jack1048697 Ster eohead phoneout1048697 Built-intuner 1048697 FullBand wid theffects1048697 R ugged pr ofessionalgr ad echassisand expr essionped almad efr ommetal1048697 AssignableEffectOnOff1048697 Power supply includ ed

5

PRECAUTIONS

NOTEITISVER Y IMPOR TAN TTHATY OUR EADTHISSECTION TOPR O-VIDEY EAR SOFTR OUBLEFR EEUSETHISUN ITR EQUIR ESCAR EFULHAN -DLING

bullAllwar ningsonthisequipmentand intheoper atinginstr uctionsshould beadhered to and all operating instructions should be followed

bullDonotusethisequipmentnear water Car eshould betakensothatobjectsdo not fall and liquids are not spilled into the unit through any openings

bull Thepower cor d ad apter should beunplugged fr omtheoutletwhenleftunused for a long period of time

bullDonotblockany ventilationopenings(ifapplicable)Installinaccor -dance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions

bullDonotinstallnear any heatsour cessuchasr ad iator s heatr egister s stovesor other appar atus(includ ingamplifier s)thatpr od uceheat

bullOnly used attachmentsaccessor iesspecified by themanufactur er

bullDonotusethispr od uctwithany case stand tr ipod br acketor tablethatisnotspecified by themanufactur er Insur ethatthecase stand tr ipod br acketetcispr oper ly ad justed and setup(followallinstr uctions)Extr acar eand cautionshould betakentoavoid tipover and injur y

bullUnplugthisappar atusd ur inglightningstor msor whenunused d ur inglongperiods of time

R efer allser vicetoqualified ser viceper sonnelSer vicingisr equir ed whentheappar atushasbeend amaged inany way suchaspower supply or plugisd amaged liquid hasbeenspilled or objectshavefallen into the apparatus or if the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor-mally or has been dropped

DON OTATTEMPTTOSER VICETHISEQUIPMEN TTHISEQUIPMEN TSHOULDBESER VICEDBY QUALIFIEDPER SON N ELON LY DON OTMAKEANY INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS OR ADDITIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT AT ANY TIME DO NOT TAMPER WITH INTERNAL ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ATAN Y TIMEFAILUR ETOFOLLOWTHESEIN STR UCTION SMAY VOIDTHEWAR R AN TY OFTHISEQUIPMEN T ASWELLASCAUSIN GSHOCKHAZAR D

OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Do not expose this unit to excessive heat This unit is designed to operate between 32deg F and 104deg F (0deg C and 40deg C) This unit may not function properly under extreme temperatures

6

WAR N IN G

The internal driver of the Utopia G200B Banshee trade Talkbox is capable of produc-ing extremely high sound pressure levels Because of this the vinyl talkbox tube supplied withtheG200Bshould N EVER be placed near any personrsquos ear Failure to use caution andor ear protection when using this product may result in perma-nent hearing impairment or hearing loss The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this product

Due to health issues the vinyl tube sup-plied with the unit cannot be returned to the factory or dealer

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 5: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

5

PRECAUTIONS

NOTEITISVER Y IMPOR TAN TTHATY OUR EADTHISSECTION TOPR O-VIDEY EAR SOFTR OUBLEFR EEUSETHISUN ITR EQUIR ESCAR EFULHAN -DLING

bullAllwar ningsonthisequipmentand intheoper atinginstr uctionsshould beadhered to and all operating instructions should be followed

bullDonotusethisequipmentnear water Car eshould betakensothatobjectsdo not fall and liquids are not spilled into the unit through any openings

bull Thepower cor d ad apter should beunplugged fr omtheoutletwhenleftunused for a long period of time

bullDonotblockany ventilationopenings(ifapplicable)Installinaccor -dance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions

bullDonotinstallnear any heatsour cessuchasr ad iator s heatr egister s stovesor other appar atus(includ ingamplifier s)thatpr od uceheat

bullOnly used attachmentsaccessor iesspecified by themanufactur er

bullDonotusethispr od uctwithany case stand tr ipod br acketor tablethatisnotspecified by themanufactur er Insur ethatthecase stand tr ipod br acketetcispr oper ly ad justed and setup(followallinstr uctions)Extr acar eand cautionshould betakentoavoid tipover and injur y

bullUnplugthisappar atusd ur inglightningstor msor whenunused d ur inglongperiods of time

R efer allser vicetoqualified ser viceper sonnelSer vicingisr equir ed whentheappar atushasbeend amaged inany way suchaspower supply or plugisd amaged liquid hasbeenspilled or objectshavefallen into the apparatus or if the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor-mally or has been dropped

DON OTATTEMPTTOSER VICETHISEQUIPMEN TTHISEQUIPMEN TSHOULDBESER VICEDBY QUALIFIEDPER SON N ELON LY DON OTMAKEANY INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS OR ADDITIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT AT ANY TIME DO NOT TAMPER WITH INTERNAL ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ATAN Y TIMEFAILUR ETOFOLLOWTHESEIN STR UCTION SMAY VOIDTHEWAR R AN TY OFTHISEQUIPMEN T ASWELLASCAUSIN GSHOCKHAZAR D

OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Do not expose this unit to excessive heat This unit is designed to operate between 32deg F and 104deg F (0deg C and 40deg C) This unit may not function properly under extreme temperatures

6

WAR N IN G

The internal driver of the Utopia G200B Banshee trade Talkbox is capable of produc-ing extremely high sound pressure levels Because of this the vinyl talkbox tube supplied withtheG200Bshould N EVER be placed near any personrsquos ear Failure to use caution andor ear protection when using this product may result in perma-nent hearing impairment or hearing loss The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this product

Due to health issues the vinyl tube sup-plied with the unit cannot be returned to the factory or dealer

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 6: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

6

WAR N IN G

The internal driver of the Utopia G200B Banshee trade Talkbox is capable of produc-ing extremely high sound pressure levels Because of this the vinyl talkbox tube supplied withtheG200Bshould N EVER be placed near any personrsquos ear Failure to use caution andor ear protection when using this product may result in perma-nent hearing impairment or hearing loss The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this product

Due to health issues the vinyl tube sup-plied with the unit cannot be returned to the factory or dealer

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 7: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

7

2 Quick Reference

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 8: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

8

STEP 1 Turn ON the UTOPIA G200B

STEP 2 Select your desired preset by pressing any button 1-3 to select presets You may also do this by following STEP 6 NOTE - the G200B starts with preset number 1 preset 0 does not ex-ist

STEP 3 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the UP button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 4 Scroll through the different preset banks by pressing the DOWN button (Bank by 3) You may also reach your desired preset by following STEP 6

STEP 5 Use the built-in expression pedal to change the parameter(s) in real time that are assigned to the pedal controllers function

STEP 6 You may also select a preset by turning the PRESET SELECT knob

STEP 7 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to the desired effect or utility function

STEP 8 Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob to the parameter you wish to alter under the selected effect or utility function

STEP 9 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to modify a parameter value

STEP 10 After editing any function parameter press the STORE button to start the stor ingpr oced ur eThed isplay willtoggleand flashSTOR EATPR ESET If you wish to save the altered preset in the current preset location press the STORE button

a second time If you wish to store the altered preset in a different preset location turn the PRESET control to the desired preset number then press STORE a second time Anytime y ouwishtocancelthestor epr ocessjusttur nthePAR AMETER ADJUSToneclick

STEP11 Toenter the2N DFunctionmod e pr essthe2nd switch thiswilltur nonaR EDLEDabove the 2nd button You can now turn OnOff functions within that preset using the but-tons marked 1-3 (Effect OnOff MUTETUNER and TAP) When in 2nd mode the LEDs abovethebuttons1and 3willlighty ellowand theMUTETUN ER r ed Usethesameswitchmar ked 2nd tocanceland exitthe2nd Functionmod e

STEP 12 Insert the included Banshee Talkbox Tube into this hole Run the tube up the mic stand (not included) Using the included velco strap attach the other end of the tube to your micro-phone (not included)

STEP13 Usetheseknobstomakead justmentstotheGainand Toneofthetalkboxeffectand tod eter -minewhichoutputthewillbeactivewhenthetalkboxison

STEP 14 Use this switch to turn on and off the talkbox effectSTEP15 Plugy our guitar intothisjackSTEP16 Usingastand ar d guitar cablegofr omthisjacktotheinputofy our amp

Quick Referencecontinued

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 9: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

9

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panels

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 10: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

10

1 PRESET SELECT control Turning this knob scrolls through the successive presets

2 DISPLAY panel The DISPLAY shows the preset names functions and parameters that are selected

3 PARAMETER ADJUST control Thisknobisused toad justad isplay ed par ameter valueN otethatthisknobisalsoused asa

contr oller knoband issettoMASTER VOLUMEfr omthefactor y Soy oucanusethisknobtoad justtheover allvolumeoftheG200BHowever thisknobalsocanbeassigned toother con-troller parameters (see Pedal Controllers section in this manual for more details)

4 PARAMETER SELECT control Whenad justingpar ameter values tur ningthisknobwillscr ollthr oughtheavailablepar ameter s

und er thecur r entfunctionhead ingIntheTitleEd itfunction thisknobwillscr ollthr oughthecharacter locations to be edited

5 STORE button and STORE LED Thisbuttonisused tostor evaluesintotheG200Bsmemor y whenalter ed SeeStoring

Changed Preset Parameters for more information on this procedure

6 FUNCTION SELECT control ThisknoballowsaccesstoeachfunctionoftheUTOPIAG200Bd epend ingonwhichconfigur a-

tion is currently recalled

7 PEDAL ACTIVE LED This LED will light when the built-in expression pedal is active or on

8 EXPRESSION PEDAL The built-in expression pedal will change parameter(s) that have been assigned to the pedal in the

Pedal Controllers function Use the pedal to increase or decrease volume levels or for a pitch shifting wammy effect or to bring in reverbs and delays There are many uses for this pedal Please see the Pedal Controllers section of this manual for information how to program the ex-pression pedal for many cool effects

9 UP button This button allows you to scroll UP through the preset banks Each G200B preset bank has 3

pr esetsinit(notether eisnoZer o(0)pr esetor Pr eset129)

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

Bank 00 - Presets 1-3 Bank 01 - Presets 4-6Bank 02 - Presets 7-9Bank 03- Presets 10-12Bank 04 - Presets 13-15Bank 05 - Presets 16-18Bank 06 - Presets 19-21

Bank 07- Presets 22-24Bank 08 - Presets 25-27Bank 09 - Presets 28-30Bank 10 - Presets 31-33Bank 11 - Presets 34-36Bank 12 - Presets 37-39and so on

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 11: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

11

Press the UP button once to move one preset bank up or press and hold down the button to auto-scroll UP Note that once you have reached your desired preset the preset name on the screen willbeflashingbutN OTr ecalled Theor iginalpr esetwillstillbeactiveN owselectany pr eset1-3 to recall or activate the desired preset

10 DOWN button This button allows you to scroll DOWN through the preset banks and functions in the same man-

ner as the UP button (point 9)

11 PRESET button 1 This button allows you to select presets 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 etc When you are in

Bank 01 this button allows you to select preset 4 When you are in Bank 02 this button allows y outoselectpr eset7and soonN otethatther eisno0(zer o)pr esetWhenin2nd mod e thisbutton is used to turn OnOff the EFFECT that has been assigned to the preset selected

12 PRESET button 2 This button allows you to select presets 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 etc When you are

in Bank 00 this button allows you to select preset 2 When you are in Bank 01 this button al-lowsy outoselectpr eset5and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused totur nOnOffthe MUTETUNER Function This will mute the output of the G200B and allow you to tune in silence

13 PRESET button 3 This button allows you to select presets 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 30 etc When you are in Bank

00 this button allows you to select preset 3 When you are in Bank 01 this button allows you to selectpr eset6and soonWhenin2nd mod e thisbuttonisused toactivatetheTAPfunctionand set the DELAY Rate by tapping the button at the desired rate

14 2nd Button This button allows you to enter the 2nd Function Mode In the 2nd Function Mode you can use

button 1 (EFFECT ONOFF) to turn on and off a pre-assigned effect within the preset You can also access the MUTETUNER function using button 2 and set the delay rate within a preset us-ing the TAP button (button 3) To Exit 2nd Function mode press the 2nd Button

15 BANSHEE TALKBOX GAIN Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheamountofpr eampGAIN or

distortion added to the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

16 BANSHEE TALKBOX TONE Control WhentheBansheeTalkboxisonusethiscontr oltoad justtheover allTON Eor equalizationof

the sound that is traveling up the talkbox tube

17 BANSHEE TALKBOX TUBE Hole Insert the talkbox tube into this opening This opening sits directly above the internal driver and

will direct the sound up the tube

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 12: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

12

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

18 BANSHEE TALKBOX LEFTMONO OUTPUT Control Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent

toy our amplifier whenusingtheBansheeand y our amplifier slivesound together atthesametime

19 BANSHEE TALKBOX ONOFF Footswitch This Footswitch turns the talkbox effect ON and OFF The LED above the switch will be lit

when it is ON and not lit when OFF

20 EXPRESSION PEDAL switch To activate the Expression pedal apply pressure to the toe of the expression pedal until this

switch is activated You will know the pedal is active as you should be able to feel the switch activate butifnot thePEDALACTIVELEDwilllightwhentheswitchistur ned ON

21 GUITAR INPUT jack Thisstand ar d mono14jackisused topr ovid einputtotheunit

22 OUTPUT RIGHT jack This14jackpr ovid esther ightoutputoftheUTOPIAG200Bfor useinster eosituations such

asd ir ectr ecor d ing pluggingintoaPAsy stem twoGuitar amplifier s etc

23 OUTPUT LEFTMONO jack This14jackpr ovid estheleftoutputoftheUTOPIAG200BThisoutputisaMON Ooutput

and should beused inmonosituations suchaspluggingintothefr ontofanamplifier For ster eosituations you must also use the OUTPUT RIGHT Jack

24 AUX INPUT Jack This18ster eojackpr ovid esanauxiliar y inputallowingy outoplugaMP3Play er CDPlay er

etcsothaty oucanjamalongwithy our favor itetunes

25 PHONES jack This18rdquoster eojackpr ovid esaster eooutputallowingy outopr acticeinpr ivateN otethaty ou

need to activate the ldquoSTEREOrdquo parameter in the GLOBAL Function in order to have a stereo sound Additionally it is recommended that you set the Speaker Simulator in the GLOBAL FunctiontoldquoLOCKBOTHrdquoaswellN ote thissettingwillbeused untily outur nOFFtheUTO-PIAG200BTheSPEAKER Simulator settingused ineachpr esetmay bemod ified per pr esetwhile in this mode See page 22 for more information on the GLOBAL Function Note Make sur eify oued itapr esetand plantostor eittotur ntheSPEAKER SIMULATOR offify oud onot desire to store its current status All global parameters will be stored during the preset storing process

26 USB jack This standard USB jack allows you to connect to a computer for direct recording and

playback

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 13: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

13

3 UTOPIA G200B Top and Back Panelscontinued

27 MIDI OUTTHRU jack This 7-pin DIN connector passes on the MIDI information that is received at the MIDI IN

jack to other MlDI-compatible devices via a MIDI cable It also outputs MIDI data when performing a memory dump

Note a standard 5-pin MIDI cable may be used

28 MIDI IN jack This 7-pin DIN connector receives MIDI information from the device which is transmit-

ting the MIDI commands for the G200B to execute

29 POWER jack This4-pinDIN connector acceptspower fr omthe9VACad aptor supplied withtheG200B

30 BANSHEE LEFTMONO MUTE Switch Thisswitchd eter mineswhether theLEFTMON Ooutputsenttoy our amplifier isON or OFF

only when the Banshee is being used

31 POWER Switch Use this switch to turn the UTOPIA G200B On and Off

32 BANSHEE TALKBOX Tube Thetubeinser tsintheholeinthetopoftheG200BThenwhenON thesound fr omtheinter -

nald r iver isd ir ected upthetubetotheuser smouthFollowallpr ecautionsstated atthebegin-ning of this manual

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 14: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

14

4 ConnectionsStandard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 15: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

15

4 Connectionscontinued

Standard Connection with a Guitar Amplifier without Banshee being used

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 16: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

16

Connection in Stereo to Two Guitar Amplifiers

4 Connectionscontinued

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 17: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

17

Connection to a PA System

4 Connectionscontinued

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 18: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

18

Connection to a Computer

4 Connectionscontinued

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 19: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

19

Connection to a Recording Workstation

4 Connectionscontinued

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 20: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

20

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection Using an Outboard Effect and MIDI

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 21: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

21

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI IN from a Computer with MIDI Utility Program

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 22: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

22

4 Connectionscontinued

Connection for MIDI OUT to Computer with MIDI Utility Program

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 23: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

23

5 Operating FormatThe G200B provides 128 stored sounds called presets Any of the 128 presets can be

called upatany timeviathePR ESETknob or by usingtheBAN KUPDOWN buttonsand PRESET switches The Banshee Talkbox is available on ALL presets by turning it ONOFF via the Banshee Footswitch

Each preset has the following effects available at all times

CompressorWah WahPhaserPreampHUSHSpeaker SimulatorOne Modulation Effect ( Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift)DelayReverbBansheeTalkboxcanbetur ned Onor Offatany timeviatheBAN SHEESwitch

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 24: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

24

6 UTOPIA G200B Functions and Parameter Descrip-tions

Each UTOPIA G200B preset is divided up into individual blocks called functions(suchasMixer R ever b etc)Withineachfunctionofeachcon-figur ationisasetofcontr olswhichallowy outomanipulatevar iousaspectsofthat function These controls are called parameters It is the setting of each of the parameters which determines the overall sound of each preset

TheUTOPIAG200Bissetuptoallowy outofir staccesseachfunction(viathe FUNCTION SELECT knob) then the parameter list for each function (via the PAR AMETER SELECTknob)and finally thead justablevaluefor eachpar ameter (via the PARAMETER ADJUST knob)

The functions available for each preset are dependent upon which effect is currently recalled The remainder of this section will describe each of the effect-based functionsand theassociated ad justablepar ameter sthey pr ovid e

The remaining functions are utility-based and are described in the section titled Operating the UTOPIA G200B

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 25: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

25

Thefir stfunctiond isplay ed after tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECTknobistheGlobalfunctionTheparameters provided in this function affect all presets (ie the settings stored for these parameters are the same for all presets)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Global parameters

6 GLOBAL Function

The OUTPUT parameter determines whether the output of the UTOPIA G200B is a stereo (left and right) signal or two mono signals

ThisSPEAKER Simulator par ameter und er theGlobalfunctionallowsy outoglobally (all presets) set the Speaker Simulator into the following modes UN LOCK-By passestheSpeaker Simulator onallpr esetsleavingtheoutputsfull range

LOCKOFF-Ify ouhavetheSpeaker Simulator ON intheSpeaker Simulator Function the Speaker Simulator will turn on when that preset is selected

LOCKL(LEFTOUTPUT)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON intheLEFTOUTPUT and leaves the Right OUTPUT full range Allows you to use the left output for direct recording or direct to a PA and the right output to your amp at the same time to perform live

LOCKB(BOTHOUTPUTS)-LockstheSpeaker Simulator ON inbothLeftand Right Outputs This is the ideal setting to use when using headphones

TheHUSHOFFSETpar ameter allowsy outoglobally (allpr esets)ad justtheHUSHreg Expander Threshold This means that if this parameter is altered from 0(dB) to +3(dB) the Expander Threshold will be 3dB higher for all presets This feature can be useful when switching from a quiet guitar with passive electron-ics to a noisy guitar with active electronics as the active guitar would require a higher Threshold level in all presets

TheMASTER VOLUMEhasar angefr om-40d Buto+6d BuThiscontr olad juststheover allvolumeoftheoutputand isextr emely usefulinad justingthevolume in headphones

Note When the preset title is being displayed the PARAMETER ADJUST con-tr olwillpr ovid einstantaccesstomod ify theMASTER VOLUMEany time

OUTPUT

SPKR SIM

HUSH OFFSET

MASTER VOLUME

NOTE If you would like to save any changes made to the GLOBAL PARAMETERS you must STORE them at this time before leaving the GLOBAL FUNCTION

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 26: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

26

6 MIXER FunctionThe next function displayed after turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise is the Mixer

functionTheMixer functionpar ameter sar einclud ed inallpr esets--r egar d lessofwhichconfigur ationis currently recalled -- although the parameter values stored in this function are only for the currently recalled preset

Thisd igitalmixer allowsy outocontr olmostsignallevelsper tainingtoeachpr esetsconfigur ationand stores these levels for each preset

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Mixer parameters

TheVOLUMEpar ameter d eter minestheover allsignallevelofthecur r entpr e-set

TheLEFTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter theleveloftheleftchanneloutput of the current preset independent of the right channel

TheR IGHTOUTLEVELpar ameter allowsy oualter thelevelofther ightchan-nel output of the current preset independent of the left channel

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoeffect (Chorus Flange Pitch Shift) signal level

The DIRECT PAN parameter allows you to pan the direct signal to the left or right

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthelevelofther ever bsignalattheoutput relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Reverb function parameter list

VOLUME

LEFT OUT LVL

RIGHT OUT LVL

MIX DIREFF

DIR PAN

DELAY LVL

REVERB LVL

ThePR EAMPfunctionisaccessibleinallconfigur ationsThepr eampstageoffer s5channelchoicesranging from clean to high gain for maximum sustain and distortion

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PREAMP parameters

6 PREAMP Function

TheCHAN N ELpar ameter choosesoneofthefive(5)PR EAMPty pesCLEAN TEXAS BR ITISH MEGAampScor ch

The GAIN parameter determines the gain value in the distortion stage

CHANNEL

GAIN

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 27: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

27

TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter ad juststhelevelatwhichthepr eampstageintheUTOPIAG200Bbeginstod istor tAVar iacisavoltageattenuatingd e-vicethatplugsintoanACwalloutletand ad juststhevoltageleveltoany d evicewhichisplugged intoitFor y ear s many guitar istshaveplugged their amplifier head sintoaVar iacand r ed uced thevoltagecomingintotheamplifier fr omtheACwalloutletThisallowstheamplifier tubestor eachsatur ationatalower inputleveland incr easesthegainpr od uced TheVAR IACADJUSTpar ameter oper atesinasimilar manner asaconventionalVar iac--wher elower ingthepa-rameter value lowers the level at which saturation will take place

TheBASSpar ameter ad juststheamountoflowfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

TheMIDpar ameter ad juststheamountofmid fr equency infor mationattheout-put of each preset

TheTR EBLEpar ameter ad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor mationattheoutput of each preset

ThePR ESEN CEpar ameter alsoad juststheamountofhighfr equency infor ma-tion at the output of each preset

The BRIGHT parameter is displayed only when channel 1 (Clean) is active The options you have are IN or OUT

The SCOOP parameter is displayed only when the MEGA and SCORCH chan-nelssar eactive and pr ovid esafixed scoopofthemid fr equencies

The MASTER parameter determines the overall signal level coming out of the preamp section

TheSY MMETR Y par ameter ad juststhesy mmetr y ofthewavefor mThismay bead justed fr om-28d Bto+6d B0d Bissy mmetr icalThismay beused toap-proximate a tube bias characteristic Depending on the settings and polarity more even or odd harmonics may be produced during the distortion process

Tip When using -28dB you will notice a sense of a clean tone mixed in with thedistortion This is a direct result of the Asymmetrical waveform transformation process This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

By usingvar y ingamountsofsy mmetr y aldquoTubefeelrdquomay ber ealized The POLARITY parameter determines which half of the wave gets processed This function is not available when the CLEAN channel is selected

TheDX-FILTER par ameter filter soffthehar shhigh-end contentThelower thenumber themor ehigh-end cutZer o(0)isnochangeThisfunctionisnotavailable when the CLEAN channel is selected

VARIAC ADJUST

BASS

MID

TREBLE

PRESENCE

BRIGHT

SCOOP

MASTER

SYMMETRY

POLARITY

DX-FILTER

6 PREAMP Function continued

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 28: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

28

The HUSHreg functionisaccessibleinallpr esets-r egar d lessoftheconfigur ationcur r ently r ecalled

HUSH is a patented single-ended noise reduction system The HUSH system contained in the UTO-PIA G200B though modeled after the latest analog HUSH design is a fully digital implementation achieved through Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The low level expander of the HUSH system operates like an electronic volume control The analog ver sionoftheHUSHutilizesavoltage-contr olled amplifier (VCA)cir cuitwhichcancontr olthegainbetween the input and the output from unity to 30 40 or even 50(dB) of gain reduction When the input signalisabovetheuser pr esetthr eshold point theVCAcir cuitr emainsatunity gain(Thismeansthatthe amplitude of the output signal will be equal to that of the input signal) As the input signal level drops below the user preset threshold point downward expansion begins At this point the expander acts like an electronic volume control and gradually begins to decrease the output signal level relative to the input signal level As the input signal drops further below the threshold point downward expansion in-creases A drop in the input level by 20(dB) would cause the output level to drop approximately 40(dB) (ie 20(dB) of gain reduction) In the absence of any input signal the expander will reduce the gain so thatthenoisefloor becomesinaud ible

The HUSH circuit is located after the AD converter in the signal chain to reduce any noise gener-ated from the Guitar and the AD converter This ensures a quiet input signal to the preamp section Because the preamp section of the UTOPIA G200B is digital it is virtually noise-free (even for the high-

6 HUSHreg Function

TheHUSHIOpar ameter simply d eter mineswhether theHUSHreg cir cuitisac-tive for the current preset

TheEXPTHR ESHOLD(Expaner Thr eshold )par ameter d eter minesthelevelatwhichd ownwar d expansionbeginsFor example iftheEXPTHR ESHOLDwasset at -20(dB) and the input signal dropped below -20(dB) downward expansion would begin

HUSH IO

EXPTHRESHOLD

gain channels) Therefore a quiet input signal to the preamp will result in a quiet output signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these Hush parameters

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 29: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

29

6 SPEAKER SIMULATOR FunctionTheSPEAKER Simulator functionisinclud ed inallpr esetsand pr ovid esar ealisticappr oximation

of a miked speaker cabinet for applications involving connecting the UTOPIA G200B directly to a mix-ing board recording system or other full range system

NOTE The parameters provided in this function are operational only when the SPKR SIM parameter under the GLOBAL FUNCTION is stored UNLOCK LOCK L or LOCK B

ThePAR AMETER SELECTknobwillallowy outoaccesstheseSPEAKER Simulator par ameter s

TheSPEAKER Simulator par ameter allowsy outoselectwhether theSpeaker Simulator is on for BOTH outputs on for only the LEFT output or OFF

TheSPEAKER TY PEpar ameter d eter minesthety peofspeaker tobesimulated 15 12 10 8and fullr angespeaker sar eavailable

The MIC POSITION parameter simulates a microphone placed anywhere from the center of the speaker cone out to the edge of the cone Positive parameter values simulate moving the microphone toward the center of the speaker while negative values move it to the edge

The REACTANCE parameter simulates the characteristics of the interaction betweenatubeamplifier and aguitar speaker cabinetThehigher thepar ameter value selected the more these characteristics will be apparent Negative values of reactance can be used to simulate an open-back cabinet

SPKR SIM

SPKR TYPE

MIC POSITION

REACTANCE

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 30: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

30

6 COMPRESSOR Function

The COMPRESSOR INOUT parameter determines whether the compressor is active for the current preset

The COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter determines the input level (in dB) at which compression will begin Lower settings of this parameter will result in more compression

TheCOMPR ESSOR ATTACKpar ameter d eter minesthespeed (inmillisecond s)in which the compressor will reach its maximum compression level after the input signal has exceeded the threshold level (set by the COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD parameter)

The COMPRESSOR RELEASE parameter determines the speed in which com-pression will cease after the input signal has dropped below the threshold level

COMPRESSOR

COMP THRESH

COMP ATTACK

COMP RELEASE

TheCOMPR ESSOR functionisavailableinallconfigur ationsThisfunctionallowsy outocom-press the signal prior to the distortion stage Compression is often used to maintain an even level when using clean tones and also to increase sustain when using distorted tones

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these COMPRESSOR parameters

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 31: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

31

6 WAH-WAH Function

TheWAH-WAHfunctionisavailableonly inconfigur ationswhichd isplay WAHintheconfigur a-tion title

The UTOPIA G200B has an internal wah-wah which allows for the built-in expression pedal to be used as a wah-wah pedal when selected in the Pedal Controllers function To do this you will need to activatethisinthePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfunctionand assignthewahfr equency sweeppar ameter s(SeePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor einfor mation)

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these WAH-WAH parameters

The WAH-WAH parameter determines whether the wah-wah is active for the current preset You can select IN to make the Wah active or OUT to turn it off

The WAH FREQUENCY parameter allows you to manually sweep the frequency range of the wah-wah via the PARAMETER ADJUST control Selecting a frequency for this parameter and storing the WAH-WAH parameter IN allows you to use the wah-wahasafixed wahY oumay alsoassignthewahtothebuilt-inexpr essionped alSeesectioncalled PEDALCON TR OLLER Sfor mor ed etails

WAH-WAH

WAH FREQ

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 32: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

32

6 PHASER FunctionThePHASER functionisavailableonly inconfigur ationsd isplay ingPHAintheconfigur ation

title

Phase shifting involves splitting the input signal into two signals then shifting the phase of different frequencies of one signal and mixing it back with the original signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PHASER parameters

The PHASER INOUT parameter determines whether the Phaser is active for the current preset

TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalleveltoPHASER signal level

The DEPTH parameter determines the modulation depth of the phase shift effect Higher par ameter settingsr esultinthesweepofthefilter ingeffectoccur r ingover a wider frequency range

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the phase shifted signal is modulated

The RESONANCE parameter adds feedback to the Phaser so that it has a more pronounced effect

The STAGES parameter determines how many stages of phase shift are to be activeApar ameter settingof4pr od ucesar esultsimilar toavintagePhase90 whileasettingof6emulatesother phaser ped als

PHASER

MIX DIREFF

DEPTH

P-RATE

RESONANCE

STAGES

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 33: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

33

6 MODULATION EFX Function

Usingthepar ameter ad justknoby oucanselectoneofthefollowingMODULA-TION EFFECT

CHORUS FLANGER TREMOLO PITCH SHIFT

Once you have made a change in Modulation effect selection the G200B will automatically turn the effect on and load a preset state for you to start with or justuseasitisY oumay thenfur ther ed ittheeffectby tur ningtheFUN CTION SELECT knob one click to the right to access the FUNCTIONS of the selected Effect See following pages for details on the functions and parameters of each effect

AvailableSelections

TheMODULATION EFXfunctionallowsy outoselectaMODULATION effectfor eachpr eset

The PARAMETER ADJUST knob will allow you to select a Modulation Effect

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 34: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

34

6 CHORUS Function

The CHORUS parameter determines whether the Chorus is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1inr elationtoVoice2TheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsod eter minestheChor uslevel

PAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice1signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher settingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice1

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice1 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 1 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice1Thisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice2)isd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

CHORUS

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

DELAY 1

TheCHOR USfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

TheChor useffectintheUTOPIAG200Bispr od uced by usingtwod elay ed signals(Voice1and Voice2) d etuningthesed elay ed signals(slightly changingtheir pitch) thenmod ulatingthed etuneef-fect so that the amount of pitch detune is constantly varying Using different detune amounts modula-tion rates modulation depths and pan settings for each delayed signal will produce a greater perceived spaciousness

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these CHORUS parameters

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 35: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

35

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2inr elationtoVoice1

PAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationoftheVoice2signalA lower depth setting will produce a more subtle detune effect while a higher set-tingwillpr od uceamor eextr emed etuningofVoice2

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthesweepspeed (or thespeed atwhichVoice2 is modulated) Lower parameter settings will result in slower speeds while higher settings will result in faster speeds

The DELAY 2 parameter allows you to select the minimum delay time (in mil-lisecond s)for Voice2Itisthisd elay ed signal(alongwithVoice1)thatisd etuned and modulated to produce the chorus effect Using shorter delay times will result in a tighter sounding chorused signal while longer delay times will produce a larger ambient effect

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

DELAY2

6 CHORUS Function Continued

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 36: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

36

6 FLANGER FunctionTheFLAN GER functionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

Flanginginvolvessplittingtheinputsignalintoatleasttwoind ivid uald elay ed signals(Voice1and voice 2) then modulating these delayed signals so that when summed back with the direct signal phase cancellations will occur at some frequencies while peaks in the response will occur at others

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these FLANGER parameters

The Flanger INOUT parameter determines whether the Flanger is active for the current preset

TheLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice1r elativetoVoice2 Tip Keep the settings of these levels high and use the

DIREFF mix parameter in the Mixer function to con-trol the overall amount of flanged signal

ThePAN 1par ameter allowsy outopanVoice1totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH1par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice1Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE1par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice1ismod ulated

TheLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofVoice2r elativetoVoice1

ThePAN 2par ameter allowsy outopanVoice2totheleftor r ightchannel

TheDEPTH2par ameter ad juststheamountofmod ulationofVoice2Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle effects while higher settings will result in a more drastic effect

TheR ATE2par ameter d eter minesthespeed atwhichVoice2ismod ulated

The REGENERATION parameter determines how much of the delayed out-put signal is fed back into the input More regeneration produces a more pro-nounced jetair planety peofeffect

FLANGER

LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DEPTH 1

RATE 1

LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DEPTH 2

RATE 2

REGEN

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 37: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

37

6 TREMOLO Function

TheTR EMOLOfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunction

The Tremolo effect continuously varies the volume of the signal

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these TREMOLO parameters

The TREMOLO INOUT parameter determines whether the Tremolo is active or bypassed for the current preset

The LOCATION parameter determines whether the Tremolo is located Pre-Re-ver bor Post-R ever bMostvintageamplifier sconfigur ed theTr emolo(or vibr ato)Post-Reverb

The DEPTH parameter determines the amount of modulation for the Tremolo signal Lower DEPTH settings produce more subtle tremolo effects while higher settings will result in a more extreme tremolo effect

The RATE parameter determines the speed at which the tremolo signal modu-lates (or increases and decreases in volume)

The SHAPE parameter determines the wave shape of the tremolo signal Select-ing a different wave shape produces a different tremolo effect

TREMOLO IO

LOCATION

DEPTH

T-RATE

SHAPE

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 38: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

38

6 PITCH SHIFT Function

ThePITCHSHIFTfunctionisavailableify ouhaveselected itintheMODULATION EFXFunc-tion

Pitch Shifting is used to change the pitch of the input signal to produce a harmony note based on the inputsignalThehar mony voicemay beofany fixed inter valmdashuptooneoctaveabovetheinputsignaltotwooctavesbelowmdashand isselected in20-centincr ementsFinead justmentcanbemad einonecent(1 100th semi tone) increments

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these PITCH SHIFT parameters

The PITCH SHIFT INOUT parameter determines whether the Pitch Shifter is active or bypassed for the current preset

TheLEVELpar ameter d eter minesthevolumeofthepitchshifted signalTheDIR EFFMIXpar ameter intheMixer functionalsoaffectsthisvolume

The PAN parameter allows you to pan the shifted signal to the left or right chan-nel

The PITCH parameter selects what harmony note the UTOPIA G200B will produce based on the input note The value displayed for this parameter r epr esentsthenumber ofcentsthatthesignalwillbeshifted (ad justablein20-centincr ements)Each100cents(or five20-centsteps)aboveor below0represents the number of half-steps the shifted signal will be from the input signal

Thispar ameter isad justablefr om-2400to+1200 wher e-2400=twooctavesbelowtheinputsignal 0=unisonand +1200=oneoctaveabovetheinputsignalR efer tothetablebelowtod eter minethecentvaluefor eachfixed interval

TheFIN Epar ameter allowsfor ad justmentin1-centstepsfor finead justmentofthe harmony note

The SPEED parameter determines the amount of time delay used in the shifting process SLOW results in the longest delay and the highest quality shifted sig-nal (especially at larger amounts of pitch shift) FAST results in the least delay but the lowest quality shifted signal This setting should only be used for slight amounts of pitch shift

PITCH SHIFT

LEVEL

PAN

PITCH

FINE

SPEED

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 39: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

39

6 PITCH SHIFT INTERVALS

NOTE There are 5 steps of the parameter adjust control between each of the intervals shown above (each step equals 20 cents) This allows for smooth pitch change when used with the built-in expression pedal

Voices above the input signal

Voices below the input signal

PARAMETER VALUE

+1200+1100+1000

+900+800+700+600+500+400+300+200+100

0-100-200-300-400-500-600-700-800-900

-1000-1100-1200-1300-1400-1500-1600-1700-1800-1900-2000-2100-2200-2300-2400

CORRESPONDINGINTERVAL

1 OctaveMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2ndunisonMajor 7thminor 7thMajor 6thminor 6thperfect 5thdiminished 5thperfect 4thMajor 3r d minor 3rdMajor 2nd minor 2nd1 octave1octaveplusaMajor 7th1 octave plus a minor 7th1octaveplusaMajor 6th1 octave plus a minor 6th1 octave plus a perfect 5th1 octave plus a diminished 5th1 octave plus a perfect 4th1octaveplusaMajor 3r d 1 octave plus a minor 3rd1octaveplusaMajor 2nd 1 octave plus a minor 2nd2 octaves

Equal to the input signal

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 40: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

40

6 DELAY FunctionThe DELAY function is available in all presets

Delay is a reproduction of the input signal occurring at a prescribed time (usually expressed in mil-liseconds) following the input signal The UTOPIA G200B provides two discrete delays (Delay 1 and Delay 2) each of which has its own parameters to determine its particular characteristics

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these DELAY parameters

The DELAY parameter determines whether the Delay is active or muted for the current preset

The MUTE TYPE parameter allows for muting the delay at its input (PRE) its output (POST) or BOTH

Muting the input (PRE) of the delay will not allow any signal to enter the delay section until the delay is switched in When using a moderate amount of regen-eration switching out the delay with the input muted will allow you to generate a non-delayed signal which will play over the decaying regenerated signal which continues on after the delay is switched out

Muting the output (POST) of the delay will result in the delayed signal being im-mediately turned off when the delay is switched out This means that delays and regeneration will not continue when the delay is switched out If the output were not muted signals that were input before the delay was switched out would be allowed to regenerate even after switching out the delay

It is also possible to mute both the input and the output (BOTH) so that no signal enters or exits the Delay section when it is not switched in

TheDELAY LEVELpar ameter d eter minestheover alllevelofthed elay ed signalat the output relative to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter can also be accessed from the Delay function parameter list

TheMIXpar ameter isused tod efinether atioofSour ce1signaltoSour ce2signaltobeinputtotheDelay sectionSour ce1istheVoice1outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchain(chor us flanger pitchshifter etc) whileSour ce2may betheVoice2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor the direct signal (selectable via the SOURCE 2 parameter)

Inconfigur ationswher ether eisnoeffectimmed iately pr eced ingthed elay Source 1 and Source 2 will be the preamp output (direct) signal

DELAY

MUTE TYPE

DELAY LVL

MIX

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 41: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

41

The SOURCE 2 parameter is used to select whether the Source 2 input will be theVOICE2outputfr omthepr eviouseffectinthesignalchainor thed ir ectsignal (DIR)

The DELAY HIGH FREQUENCY DAMPING parameter controls the amount of high frequency content in the delayed and regenerated signals Higher amounts of damping will result in less high frequency information in the delayed signal

TheOUTPUTLEVEL1par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 1r elativetoDelay 2

The PAN 1 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 1 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 1 parameter determines the length of time (in milliseconds) after the input signal that the Delay 1 signal will begin

The REGENERATION 1 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 1 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats The displayed valuer epr esentstheattenuation(ind B)thatther egener ationsignalissubjected to at each repeat

TheOUTPUTLEVEL2par ameter d eter minesthevolumeofDelay 2r elativetoDelay 1

The PAN 2 parameter allows you to pan the Delay 2 signal to the left or right channel

The DELAY TIME 2 parameter determines the length of time after the input signal that the Delay 2 signal will begin This length of time is measured in mil-liseconds

The REGENERATION 2 parameter determines the number of times the Delay 2 signal will repeat itself This is achieved by feeding the delayed output back into the input Higher parameter settings will result in more repeats

SOURCE 2

DLY HF DAMP

OUT LEVEL 1

PAN 1

DLY TIME 1

REGEN 1

OUT LEVEL 2

PAN 2

DLY TIME 2

REGEN 2

The Delay features a regeneration limiter since setting both REGEN parameters to high levels would result in louder and louder echoes until a severe overload occurs The limiter senses when this condition would occur and automatically turns down both REGEN levels to avoid such an instability This is especially important when REGEN levels are being adjusted in real-time

The regeneration levels can be reset by recalling the preset or by accessing the REGEN 1 and REGEN 2 parameters and turning the ADJUST control

6 DELAY Function Continued

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 42: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

42

6 TAP QUANTIZING Function

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 1

Select Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter Half Whole or NONE for Delay 2

DELAY 1

DELAY 2

TheTAPQUAN TIZIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectaTAPr atefor thed elay pr esetWhenin2nd Function Mode you can use the Tap Button (Preset button 3) to set the rate of the delay This is ideal whenplay ingliveand y ouwould liketochangethed elay r ateinr ealtimewithoutmissingabeat

TheTapQuantizingcanbeset(or fixed )for eachpr esetWhenpr essingtheTAPbutton4consecu-tivetimesatthetempoy ouwantthed elay willautomatically bequantized tooneoftheselected TAPButtonPar ameter sasshownbelowTheY ellowTAPLEDwillflashtoind icatethequantized d elay r ate

Her eisatableshowingwhatthed elay quantizingmeans

SIXTEEN One-Quar ter ofthetimebetweentaps(16thN ote) EIGHTH One-half of the time between taps (8th Note) TRIPLET Two-thirds of the time between taps (Triplet) QUARTER Equal to the time between taps (14 Note) HALF Two times the amount of time between taps (12 note) WHOLE Four times the amount of time between taps (Whole Note) NONE No Tapping

The PARAMETER SELECT will allow you to access these TAP QUANTIZING parameters

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 43: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

43

6 REVERB Function

Reverb is a multitude of echoes spaced so close together that to the human ears seem as a single continuous sound These echoes gradually decrease in intensity until they are ultimately absorbed by the boundaries and obstacles within a room As the sound waves from the sound source strike the boundar-iesofar oom apor tionoftheener gy isr eflected away fr omtheobstaclewhileanother por tionisab-sor bed intoit-ther eby causingboththecontinuanceofsound aswellasthed ecay ingor d y ingoutofthe sound

The PARAMETER SELECT knob will allow you to access these REVERB parameters

TheR EVER BIN PUTpar ameter d eter mineswhether theinputtotheR ever bsec-tionisACTIVE(passingasignal)or MUTED(willnotpassasignal)

TheMIXDIR ECTDELAY par ameter isused tod efinether atioofd ir ectsignalto delayed signal to be input to the reverb section

TheR EVER BLEVELpar ameter allowsy outocontr olthelevelofther ever bsignal at the output in relation to the direct signal and other effect signals This parameter is also accessible from the Mixer function

TheR EVER BDECAY par ameter d eter minesthelengthoftimethatther ever bsignal will sound before it has completely died out

TheR EVER BHIGHFR EQUEN CY DAMPIN Gpar ameter isused tocontr olthedecay rate of high frequency information in the reverb signal Higher parameter settings will result in a faster decay of high frequency information

REV INPUT

MIX DIRDLY

REVERB LVL

REV DECAY

REV HF DAMP

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 44: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

44

TheBansheeTalkboxisaself-contained talkboxeffectwithitsownpr eampand power amplifier for driving the internal horn driver Unlike other Banshee Talkboxes in the Rocktron product range the Utopia G200B talkbox makes use of the internal presets of the G200B Different distortions and effects can be used with the talkbox to create new and different tones and sounds

The Banshee has three controls and a switch that allow you have many different combinations of sounds depending on your need

The Banshee Talkbox controls and their functions are as follows

This control determines the overall gain of the internal preamp This will add that talkbox edge to the preset you have selected

Thie control determines the overall TONE or equaliztion of the talkbox sound

LEFTMONO output knob = Determines the amount of attenuation that may be applied to the LEFTMONO output signal sent to your amplifier when using the Banshee and your amplifiers live sound together at the same time Using the LEFTMONO output control provides added flexibility with regards to customizing the blend you hear on stage between your amps stage volume and the Banshees physical output volume when both are desired Turning the LEFTMONO output knob CCW reduces your amplifiers stage volume Turning the LEFTMONO output control FULL CW brings you back to the original LEFTMONO output level Note The LEFTMONO output control only has an effect on the LEFTMONO output signal when he BANSHEE is in use When the Banshee is disengaged the LEFTMONO output control will be bypassed and the LEFTMONO output will return to its normal state

LEFTMONO Mute switch = Determines whether the LEFTMONO output sent to your amplifier is ON or OFF only when the Banshee is being used

This switch allows you to turn ON and OFF the Banshee Talkbox at any time The LED above the switch will be LIT when the Talkbox is ON

GAIN

TONE

LEFTMONOOUTPUT

LEFTMONOMUTE

SWITCH

BANSHEESWITCH

6 BANSHEE TALKBOX

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 45: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

45

WITH CHORUS FLANGER AND PITCH SHIFT MODULATION EFFECTS

7 UTOPIA G200B Block Diagrams

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 46: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

46

WITH TREMOLOMODULATION EFFECT

7 UTOPIA G200B Blocks

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 47: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

47

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

GLOBAL OUTPUT (Output Level) Stereo Mono SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Lock) Unlock LockOff LockL LockB HUSH OFFSET -10(dB) to +30(dB) MASTER VOLUME -40(d B)to+6(d B) MIXER VOLUME(VolumeLevel) 0to127 LEFTOUTLVL(LeftChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R IGHTOUTLVL(R ightChannelOutputLevel) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Dir ectEffectMixLevel) DIR lt0to100gtEFF DIR PAN (Dir ectSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR DELAY LVL(Delay SignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B)

PREAMP CHANNEL Clean Texas British Mega Scorch GAIN (Gain Level) 0 to 10 VAR IACADJUST(Var iacLevelAd justment) -6(d B)to0(d B) BASS (Bass Level) 0 to 10 MID (Midband Level) 0 to 10 TREBLE (Treble Level) 0 to 10 PRESENCE (Presence Level) 0 to 10 BRIGHT In Outt (Clean Channel Only) SCOOP Out In (MegaScorch Channels) MASTER 0 to 10 SYMMETRY -28(dBu) to +6(dBu) default is

00(dBu) (not available on Clean) POLARITY + or - (not available on Clean) DX-FILTER 0to49(notavailableonClean)

HUSH HUSH (Hush InOut) Out In EXPTHR ESH(Expand er Thr eshold Level) -90(d B)to-27(d B)

SPEAKER SPKR SIM(Speaker Simulator Status) Off Left BothSimulator SPKR TY PE(Speaker Ty pe) 15 12 10 8 Full(R ange) MIC POSITION -15 to +15 REACTANCE (Reactance Level) -15(dB) to +15(dB)

COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR (Compressor InOut Status) Out In COMP THRESH (Compression Threshold) -24(dB) to 0(dB) COMPATTACK(Compr essionAttack) 1MS 2MS 4MS 8MS 16MS

25MS 50MS 75MS COMP RELEASE (Compression Release) 05Sto 20S

WAH-WAH WAH-WAH (Wah-Wah InOut Status) Out In WAHFR EQ(WahFr equency ) 310Hzto26kHz

PHASER PHASER (Phaser InOut Status) Out In DIR EFFMIX DIR lt0to100gtEFF

DEPTH (Amount of Modulation) 0 to 100 P-RATE (Phaser Rate of Modulation) 0 to 254 RESONANCE (Amount of Feedback) 0 to 100 STAGES (Number of Stages) 4 6

7 Function - Parameter - Range List

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 48: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

48

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) (via PARAMETER ADJUST)

MODULATION MODULATION EFX Chor us Flanger Tr emoloEFX PitchShift

CHORUS CHORUS (Chorus InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 1(Voice1Delay Length) 2msto40ms LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 DELAY 2(Voice2Delay Length) 2msto40ms

FLANGER FLANGER (Flanger InOut Status) Out In LEVEL1(Voice1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Voice1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH1(Voice1Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE1(Voice1Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 LEVEL2(Voice2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Voice2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DEPTH2(Voice2Mod ulationDepth) 0to100 R ATE2(Voice2Mod ulationR ate) 0to254 REGEN (Flanger Regeneration Level) OFF to +4(dB)

TREMOLO TREMOLO (Tremolo InOut Status) Out In LOCATION (Pre or Post Reverb Location) Pre-Rev Post-Rev DEPTH (Modulation Depth) 0 to 100 T-RATE (Tremolo Modulation Rate) 0 to 254 SHAPE (Wave Shape) Triangle Square

PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT (Pitch Shift InOut Status) Out In LEVEL(PitchShiftSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) PAN (PitchShiftSignalPanning) Llt0to100gtR PITCH (Pitch Shift in 20-Cent Steps) -2400 to +1200 FINE (Pitch Shift in 1-Cent Steps) -20 to +20 SPEED (Pitch Shift Signal Speed) Slow Medium Fast

DELAY DELAY (Delay Status) Muted Active MUTE TYPE (Mute Type Status) Pre Post Both DELAY LVL(Delay Level) OFFto+4(d B) MIX(Sour ce1Sour ce2MixLevel) S1lt0to100gtS2 SOUR CE2(Sour ce2Select) DIR ECT Voice2 DLY HF DAMP (Delay High Frequency Damping) 0 to 99 OUTLEVEL1(Delay 1Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 1(Delay 1Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME1 (Delay 1 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 1 (Delay 1 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB) OUTLEVEL2(Delay 2Level) OFFto+4(d B) PAN 2(Delay 2Panning) Llt0to100gtR DLY TIME2 (Delay 2 Length) 0 to 2000ms REGEN 2 (Delay 2 Regeneration) OFF to +4(dB)

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 49: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

49

FUNCTION PARAMETER LIST RANGE(via FUNCTION SELECT) (via PARAMETER SELECT) via PARAMETER ADJUST)

TAPQUAN TIZIN G DELAY 1 Sixteen Eighth Tr iplet Quar ter

Half Whole None DELAY 2 Sixteen Eighth Triplet Quarter

Half Whole None

R EVER B R EVIN PUT(R ever bInputStatus) Muted Active MIX(Dir ectDelay MixLevel) Dir lt0to100gtDly R EVER BLVL(R ever bSignalLevel) OFFto+4(d B) R EVDECAY (R ever bDecay Length) 0to99 R EVHFDAMP(R ever bHighFr equency Damping) 0to99

PEDAL NUMB 1 ADJ IPED IPSW OFFCONTROLLERS PARA1 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used LLIMC1 Any r angeinPAR A1sselection

can be used NUMB 2 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 2 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used LLIMC2 Any r angeinPAR A2sselection

can be used NUMB 3 ADJ IPED IPSW OFF PARA 3 Any parameters available in this

configur ationcanbeselected ULIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used LLIMC3 Any r angeinPAR A3sselection

can be used

PEDAL STATUS RUN STAT (Pedal Running Status On or Off) OFFON PEDALVOLUME 0to127

FOOTSWITCH EFX1 By pass(Effectsby pass) ChannelMAPPING TOGGLE Toggle (Clean Texas British Mega Scorch) Solo Compressor Modulation Effect (Chorus Pitch Shift Flanger Tremolo) Delay

Reverb Input TBypass (By passing all processing)

MIDICHAN N ELS R ECEIVE 1-16-OMN I OFF(d efaultisOmni) TRANSMIT 1 -16 OFF (default is OFF)

MIDI DUMPLOAD 1 PR DUMPLOAD (1 Preset DumpLoad) BULKDUMPLOAD

FACTOR Y R ESTR XtoX(R estor easinglepr eset) 1to1 2to2 3to3 etcRESTORE ALL RESTORE (Restore all factory presets) Enter Number 22 - Use caution

asthiswillover -wr iteallpr esetsVER SION N UMBER TITLEEDIT XXXXXXXXX

7 Function - Parameter - Range List continued

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 50: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

50

8 Operating the UTOPIA G200B

WheninPR ESETMODEtheLEDswillbelitGR EEN and thed isplay willshowthefollowing

Top line of display will showBAN K-Display sthePr esetBanky ouhaveselected -intheexamplebelow-B00PR ESETTITLE-ThisistheN AMEofthepr eset-intheexamplebelow-UTOPIAR OCKS

Bottom line of display will showPRESET NUMBER - This is the number of the preset - in the example below - 1EFFECTS USED IN PRESET - in the example below - Psh-Dly-Rev (Pitchshift -Delay-Reverb)

8 Display Description

The LCD display on the Utopia G200B provides you with the information about the preset you are in

Whenin2N DFUN CTION MODEthe2nd LEDwillbelitR ED

When in PRESET EDIT MODE (accessed by turning the FUNCTION SELECT knob) the display will show the following

Top line of display will show the FUNCTION selected - in the example below PREAMPBottomlineofd isplay willshowthefir stPAR AMETER ofthefunction-intheexamplebelowCHAN -NEL BRITISH

B 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

BAN KN UMBER PRESET NAME

PRESET NUMBER EFFECTS ON PRESET

C H A N N E L B R I T I S H

P R E A M P

AstheBAN SHEETALKBOXisavailableonALLpr esestviatheBAN SHEEswitch thissectionofthemanual covers other aspects of the operation of the G200B

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 51: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

51

8 Selecting a preset

1

There are two ways to select a preset on the UTOPIA G200B You can either turn the PRESET knob to the desired preset you wish to recall The display will show the selected preset number

Thesecond way toselectapr esetwiththeUTOPIAG200BistousethefootswitchesUsetheBAN KUPand DOWN buttons(points1and 2inthed r awingbelow)toscr ollthr oughtheBAN KSThenselect a preset using the buttons marked 1-3 (see points 3-5 below) For example if you want to select preset 29 use the bank up button until you reach bank B09 and then press button 2 - this is preset 29 To select preset 37 use the bank up button until you see B12 in the display and then press button 1 - this is preset 37 and it will appear in the window

You will remain on the current preset until one of the preset buttons marked 1-3 (points 3-5 below) is pressed This is a useful feature in a live situation allowing you to be ready to select the next sound you would like to use in a song

b 0 4 c o m p r e s s i t

1 4 c h r - d l y - r e v

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 52: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

52

8 Preset Banks

TheUtopiaG200Bhas43banksof3pr esetseach(notethatther eisnopr eset0or pr eset129)for a total of 128 presets This is an ideal setup for live situations as you can arrange your sounds in each bank to suit your needs You can use it to set up the 3 sounds you use all the time or set up each bank by particular song The two line blue display will always show you what bank is selected (or to be select-ed) by the following indications

BAN K

B00B01B02B03B04B05B06B07B08B09B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42

CONTAINS PRESET NUMBERS

1 2 34 5 67 8 910 11 1213 14 1516 17 1819 20 2122 23 2425 26 2728 29 3031 32 3334 35 3637 38 39 40 41 4243 44 4546 47 4849 50 5152 53 5455 56 5758 59 6061 62 6364 65 6667 68 69 70 71 7273 74 7576 77 7879 80 8182 83 8485 86 8788 89 9091 92 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 102103 104 105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 53: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

53

Step 1

3 12

Step 3

Step 2

N OTEIfy ouhavechanged apar ameter theSTOR ELEDwilllightThechange(s)thaty oumad ewillnotbestor ed untily ouhavepr essed theSTOR EbuttonPleasefollowinstr uctionsonthenextpage for details on how to store changed parameters

8 Changing preset parameters

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to select the function heading which contains the parameter(s) you wish to change

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtothespecificpar ameter y ouwishtochange

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to alter the parameter value

R E V E R B

R E V I N P U T M U T E D

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 9 4

R E V E R B

R E V D E C A Y 3 2

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 54: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

54

8 Storing changed preset parameters

1342

While viewing a function or parameter title press the STORE button to start the store procedure The display will now alternate between the destination preset number and titleand STOR EATPR ESET

Step 1

Step 3

Turn the PRESET knob to select the desired preset number to store the new param-eter values into (If you wish to store the new parameter values into the current preset number this step is not necessary) The display will now alternate between the new pr esetnumber and STOR EATPR ESET

Step 2

Press the STORE button a second time to store the new values into the selected preset number Thed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDN extitwillasky ouify ouwould like to also copy the title from the preset (Turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob before completing this step will cancel the store procedure)

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

s t o r e d

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 8 C H O K E I T

5 7 T R E - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 S w e e t d r e a m

3 7 F L A - d l y - r e v

B 1 8 C H O K E I T

C O P Y T I T L E T O O

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 55: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

55

Step 4 Ify ouwould liketocopy thetitle-pr essthestor ebuttonThed isplay willbr iefly flashSTOR EDand r etur ntoPR ESETMODEIfy oud oN OTwanttocopy thetitlesimply tur nthePar ameter Ad justoneclickand thetitlewillnotbestor ed

B 1 8 s w e e t d r e a m

5 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

NOTE If a preset with altered parameters is exited before completing Step 3 and 4 all edited parameter values will be lost When saving altered parameters make sure the display flashed STORED before exiting the store procedure

8 Storing changed preset parameters continued

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 56: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

56

8 Operation Mode

The Utopia G200B has two OPERATION MODES - Preset and 2nd When in Preset mode you can select any preset you would like in the various banks When in 2nd Mode you are in the 2nd function mode of the selected preset The 2nd Function mode allows you to turn on and off various aspects of the preset

InthePR ESETMODEtheLEDsontheped alboar d willbelitGR EEN When in this mode you can select any preset in any bank that you would prefer

PRESET MODE

2ND FUNCTION MODE

Toenter intothe2N DFUN CTION MODE pr essthe2nd buttonTheLEDabovethe2nd Buttonwilltur nR EDOnceinthe2N DFUN CTION MODEyou can turn on and off the assigned Effect MUTETUNER and the TAP Delay function with the selected preset

Here is a list of those effects that can be accessed within each preset in the 2ND FUNCTION MODE

1

2

3

Exit 2nd Function

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modulation Effect Delay Reverb Input or Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitchMappingFunction) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif- ferent channels (for example between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tremolo) you have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

MUTETUNER - pressing this button will MUTE the output and turn on the built-in Tuner so that you can tune in silence

TAP - this button allows you to set the delay rates by tapping this button at the tempo desired

2ND - pressing the button again takes you OUT of the 2nd Function mode and return to PRESET MODE

BUTTON NUMBER 2ND FUNCTION

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 57: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

57

132 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

F l a n g e r

f l a n g e r i n

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

C H O R U S

8 Selecting a Modulation Effect

Step 1 Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobtoMODULATION EFX

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Chorus Flanger Tremolo or Pitch Shift

Note When changed the EFFECT will turn to a preset starting condition for you tomodify further or use directly

m O D U L A T I O N e f x

f l a n g e r

Tur nFUN CTION SELECTknobtor ightoneclicktoaccesstheselected effectsfunction controls

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected effectand y ouwould liketosavethechangesy oumad e pr essstor eand followtheinstr uctionsund er STOR -IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 58: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

58

Step 2

c

Step 1 Enter the turner mode by pressing the 2nd button and then the MUTETUNER button number 2

You will notice the MUTETUNER red LED is on and the tuner is active

Pluck the harmonic at the 12th fret of the string you intend to tune The G200B will detect the note and indicate its nearest even tempered pitch at the center of the dis-play If the note is slightly above or below any of the 12 even-tempered notes a sharp or flatcond itionisind icated by anaster isksy mbolinthebottomlineofthed isplay ateither side of the displayed note as shown below

Here is a note that is slightly above C (ie slightly sharp)

c

FLAT SHARP

c

FLAT SHARP

The Utopia G200B provides a built-in harmonic tuner which can be activated by pressing the 2nd but-ton and then the MUTETUNER button number 2 This will MUTE the output of the G200B allowing you to tune in silence Use 12th fret harmonics to tune

8 MUTEHarmonic Tuner Function

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 59: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

59

Her eisanotethatisslightly belowC(ieslightly flat)

c

FLAT SHARP

Step 3 As you tune the string the displayed asterisk will move closer to the displayed note on the top line When the plucked note is perfectly in tune with the note that is dis-play ed TUN EDwilld isplay onthebottomline

c

t u n e d - ^ - t u n e d

FLAT SHARP

To leave the TUNER and exit the MUTE function simply press button number 2 again You will return to the preset you were on Note that the LED will be lit RED to let you know that is the button to use to exit the MUTETUNER mode

Step 4

8 MUTETuner Function continued

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 60: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

60

The MIDI IN in the Utopia G200B will allow you to update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SEC-TION of this manual

Please note that though the G200B is shipped with 7 Pin din connectors any standard 5 pin MIDI cord may be used for device connections

You can connect the Utopia 200 directly to a computer via a standard USB cable (not included) and us-ing standard PC drivers The USB in the G200B will pass audio and can be used to record directly into a computer based recording system and receive the audio back into the G200B Consult your systems audio interface or recording software documentation for more information Note We suggest changing the Global Parameter to Stereo and turn on the Speaker Simulator for better over alld ir ectaud ior ecor d ingUsetheMaster VolumeoftheG200Btoad justy our signalleveltotheUSB host

8 USB Connection

8 MIDI IN

The MIDI OUTTHRU in the Utopia G200B will allow you to transmit andor update your G200B with new presets directly from a computer using any MIDI interface device Follow the connection steps in the CONNECTIONS SECTION of this manual

You can also use this to connect to a MIDI receiving device that you want to control from the G200B

8 MIDI OUTTHRU

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 61: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

61

The G200B can receive MIDI commands from other MIDI transmitting devices In order for this func-tiontooper atepr oper ly theG200BsMIDIr eceivechannelsmustbesettocor r espond totheMIDIChannelthattheother d evicesar esend ingMIDImessagesonTheMIDIR ECEIVEchanneloptionsare 1-16 OMNI and OFF

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoR eceiveChannel

M I D I c h a n n e l s

r e c e v c h a n l o m n i

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate Receive Channel 1-16 Omni and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI RECEIVE

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 62: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

62

The G200B can transmit MIDI commands to other MIDI receiving devices You must however assign aMIDITr ansmitchannelinor d er tod osoInthenextsection[PR OGR AMCHAN GES]y ouwilllearn how to send program changes to your favorite piece of rack gear

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

M i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s m i t 1 6

M I D I C H A N N E L S

Step 1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI CHANNELS

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoTr ansmitChannel

m i d i c h a n n e l s

t r a n s c h a n l o f f

Turn PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the appropriate MIDI Channel 1-16 and OFF

Oncey ouhavemad eallofthead justmentstotheselected MIDICHAN N ELand you would like to save the changes you made press store and follow the instructions und er STOR IN GCHAN GEDPR ESETPAR AMETER Sinthismanual

8 MIDI CHANNELS - MIDI Transmit

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 63: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

63

PR OGCHTX ON MAP OFFDEFAULT=OFF 1-TX-PCrarr127 [PR OGR AMTR AN SMITMAP]

Note The TRANSMIT CHANNEL must be assigned found in MIDI CHANNELS function so the G200B can send out MIDI MESSAGES

The G200B can send PROGRAM CHANGES to another MIDI capable device through the MIDI OUTTHR Ujackwhenever y our ecallapr esetY oumay send any PR OGR AMCHAN GEnumber y oud e-sir ead d ingextr aflexibility whencontr ollingafavor itepieceofoutboar d gear

PROG CH TX

ON The G200B will send PROGRAM CHANGES on a 1 to 1 basis If you recall PRESET 1 on the G200B it will send PROGRAM CHANGE 1 on the assigned TRANSMIT CHANNEL

MAP When set to MAP the G200B will send a different PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER you haveselected tobesentusingthe1-TXPCrarr127mapping Default mapping is 1 to 1

HOW TO MAP PRESETS

Usingthe 1-TXPCrarr1wheny our ecallpr eset1itcould send PR OGR AMCHAN GE127whensetas 1-TXPCrarr127

ToMAPthe-TX-PCrarriseasy and her ersquoshowy oud oit

1 Turn the FUNCTION SELECT to PROGRAM CHAGES FUNCTION

2 UsethePAR AMETER SELECTCON TR OLtoselectthe-TX-PCd isplay

3 Topickthepr esettobemapped [Thepr esety ouwillr ecall]TUR N IN GthePAR AMETER SELECT will scroll 123456 etchelliphellip

4 Now use the PARAMETER ADJUST to select the PRESET NUMBER you want sent out from the G200B

EXAMPLEG200B1-TX-PCrarr13 [R ECEIVIN GDEVICE]

5 Once you have set this PRESS STORE to complete the mapping process for that preset The display will show ldquo STORED ldquo to indicate success

Note Every changed mapping needs to be stored before advancing to the next G200B preset us- ing the PARAMETER SELECT

8 Program Changes

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 64: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

64

Any or alloftheG200Bspr esetsmay bed umped toanother G200B asequencer or MIDIutility pr o-gr amusingaPCMIDIinter facetocr eatea(sy x)fileThisfilemay beupload ed totheR ocktr onwebsite to share with other users All the information about the presets you have created will be dumped consisting of parameter values title characters and controller assignments When dumping a single pre-set into another G200B the dumped preset can be loaded into any preset location on the receiving unit

Note The G200B MIDI data when sent by external means such as a PC MIDI utility program you will need toconfigur eitasstated below

Buffer size264by tesN oofbuffer s16bothR Xand TX100ms between buffers be used initially as a starting point100msafter F7[optional]

If a Midi sequencer is used to store the data record the Sysex data in real-time or adhere to the param-eters given above

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 2

Step 3

M I D I D U M P L O A D

1 8 P R E D U M P L O A D

Step 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of the transmitting G200B to the MIDI IN of the receiving G200B Consult MIDI Connection drawing for more information

If you are dumping a single preset to another G200B the transmitting G200B must have that preset selected

Turn FUNCTION SELECT knob to MIDI DUMPLOAD

Step 4 On the receiving G200B use the PRESET Select control to select the preset location where the received preset will be stored Note that the preset currently stored at the selected location will be lost when the new preset is received

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 65: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

65

Step 6 ToBULKDUMPallpr esetstoanother G200Bor upload themtoaSequencer or Computer using a PC Midi interface along with a MIDI Utility program use thePAR AMETER SELECTknob selectBULKDUMPLOADand followSteps4and 5

Step 5 On the transmitting G200B press the STORE button to dump the preset The trans-mittingG200Bwilld isplay DUMPED

M I D I D U M P L O A D

d u m p e d

M I D I D U M P L O A D

b u l k d u m p l o a d

8 MIDI DUMPLOAD continued

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 66: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

66

Tomakead justmenttothePEDALCON TR OLLER Sfollowthesesteps

8 Pedal Controllers

3579 12246810 1

ThePed alContr oller sfunctionallowsfor specificUTOPIAG200Bad justablepar ameter stobemapped (or assigned) to three available assignments

1) PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)2) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDAL(IPED-inter nalped al)3) Thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCH(IPSW-Ped alFootswitch)

These controllers will allow for real-time control over the selected parameter

PARAMETER ADJUST knob (ADJ)TheADJselectioninPEDALCON TR OLLER Ssectionoptionletsy ouassignthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobfor quickad justMany peopleusethiscontr olasaMaster volume buty oucanassignthistoany oftheG200Bspar ameter sThed efaultsettingofthiscontr oller ismapped toMASTER VOLUME

EXPRESSION PEDAL (IPED) - internal pedalThe IPED selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALMany peopleusethis for wah volume pitchshift and other effects

EXPRESSION PEDAL FOOTSWITCH (IPSW - internal pedal footswitch) The ISPW selection in the PEDAL CONTROLLERS section options lets you assign up to three different par ameter sthatcanbead justed inr ealtimeby thebuilt-inEXPR ESSION PEDALFOOTSWITCHThedefault setting is mapped Wah On but it is Off Unless preset name relates to WAH then the switch will activate the WAH

AllofthesePEDALCON TR OLLER Slety oustor eanupper and lower par ameter valuelimitwhichthe controller cannot exceed For example when using the expression pedal to send continuous control changestocontr olthePITCHpar ameter anupper limitof+300canbesetand alower limitof-200canbesetmdasheventhoughtheactualpar ameter r angeavailableisfr om+1200to-2400Whentheexpr essionped alisatitsheelpositioninthisexample thePITCHpar ameter willbeat-200 whileatits toe position it will be at +300 Up to three controllers can be assigned for each individual preset

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 67: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

67

Step 1 To access the Pedal Controller function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise to PEDALCON TR OLER S

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to scroll through the available parameters to be as-signed to the PARA 1 parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobtoselectPAR A1Thispar ameter allowsy outoselect a parameter for the PARA 1 parameter to respond to

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobfor thefir stpar ameter oftheContr oller Assignfunc-tion This parameter allows you to select a controller number for the NUMB 1 parameter to respond toNOTE This parameter (NUMB 1 only) also gives you the option of selecting ADJ

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the controller to be assigned to the NUMB 1 parameter (either ADJ IPED IPSW or OFF)

When ADJ is selected the parameter assigned to the first controller (PARA 1) can be instantly accessed by turning the PARAMETER ADJUST knob when the preset title is dis-played This allows you to access a parameter that you adjust frequently without paging through function headings and parameters If you select IPED the parameter assigned to the first controller (NUMB 1) will be adjusted by the built-in expression pedal If you select OFF the first controller will not be assigned to either the ADJ or the IPED

8 Pedal Controllers continued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 a d j

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 1 i p e d

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 m i x d i r

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

p a r a 1 p e d a l v o l u

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 68: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

68

Step 6

Step 7

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to display the Upper Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Step 8

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to choose the highest value that the parameter is not allowed to exceed when the toe of the expression pedal is down

Step 9

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob one step clockwise to access the Lower Limit parameter (for PARA 1)

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the lowest value which the parameter is not to fall below through when the heel of the expression pedal is down

NOTE The UTOPIA G200B allows you to select an upper and lower value limit which the parameter cannot exceed For example if a parameter has a value range from 0 to 127 yet you would like the range of the parameter to vary from only 50 to 127 you may set a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 127 via the Upper (ULIM) and Lower Limit (LLIM) parameters When a parameter is stored in the Pedal Controller function (Step 7) the maximum parameter value is automatically stored as the upper limit (expression pedal toe down) while the minimum value is stored as the lower limit (expression pedal heel down)

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 0 0

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 1 2 7

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 0

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

u l i m c 1 5 0

NOTE Parameters available to be assigned may vary depending on what MODULATION effect you have selected for that particular preset

NOTE Because character space on the display is limited you may not see the entire name of a parameter For example tochooseFLAN GER LEVEL1or FLAN GER PAN 1(or any oftheFlanger spar ameter s) selectLEVEL1or PAN 1par ameter thatimmed iately followstheFLAN GER par ameter whentur ningthePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobclockwiseThis is true for some other parameters as well

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 69: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

69

Step 10

Step 11

To make changes to the second Pedal Controller turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise one click

Repeat steps 3-10 to make changes to NUMB 2 PARA 2 ULIM C2 LLIM C2 NUMB 3 PARA3 ULIM C3 LLIM C3

Selecting a lower limit value that is greater than the upper limit value will invert the response of the controller - ie the toe position of the expression controller will provide the minimum value while the heel position will provide the maximum value

You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset and then press the STORE button again Note thatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esety ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

Step 12

8 Pedal Controllerscontinued

p e d a l c o n t r o l e r s

n u m b 2 I P E d

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 70: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

70

8 PEDAL STATUS

The PEDAL STATUS is for use with the built-in expression pedal By setting the RUN STAT pa-rameter to ON the UTOPIA G200B will track the position of the expression pedal (assuming the expres-sionped alispr esently or had beenpr eviously assigned toPEDALVOLU)and var y thepr esetvolumeaccordingly from preset to preset NOTE When the RUN STAT is ON the expression pedal will as-sumethelastPEDALVOLUMEstatusr eceived Pleaseseeexamplesbelow

Example 1 lets assume that you had RUN STAT turned ON and that the preset you are using and thepr esety ouar eswitchingtobothhavetheexpr essionPed alContr oller sassigned PEDALVOLUMEIf you were to reduce the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and then changed to another preset the new preset will assume the present position of the expression pedal You WILL be able to increase the volume of the new preset with the expression pedal as both presets had the expres-sionPed alContr oller sassigned toPEDALVOLUME

Example 2 assuming you have RUN STAT turned ON and you have reduced the volume of the current preset with the expression pedal and changed to a preset where the expression Pedal Control-lers were assigned to control the Pitch Shift or Chorus or Reverb etc the new preset will assume the pr eviouspr esetsped alvolumeHowever y ouwillN OTbeabletousetheped altoincr easethevolumeas you did in example 1 With RUN STAT turned ON you would need to switch back to a preset that had the expression Pedal Controllers assigned to pedal volume use the expression pedal to increase the volume and then switch back to the other preset

This is something you should take into consideration when using the RUN STAT function

The PEDAL STATUS parameter displays the current preset volume as determined by the pedal posi-tion

NOTE When the RUN STAT parameter is set to OFF the UTOPIA G200B only recognizes volume changes from the expression pedal if PEDAL VOLUME is assigned to the pedal and it has been physically moved by the user

Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until PEDAL STATUS is displayedStep 1

1243 5

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o f f

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 71: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

71

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select ON for the RUN STAT parameter

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetotheIPEDVOLpar am-eter

ThePEDALVOLUMEpar ameter d isplay sthecur r entpr esetvolumeasd eter mined by the pedal position Move the expression pedal up and down and you will see the volume values change as the pedal moves

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

p e d a l s t a t u s

r u n s t a t o n

p e d a l s t a t u s

i p e d v o l 1 2 7

TheIPEDVOLwillonly changeinr ealtimeiftheInter nalped alhasbeenassigned totheIPEDVOLpar ameter Other wisetocheckped aloper ationpleaseviewthepa-rameter that it is assigned to IE If assigned to Chorus Rate got to the Chorus Func-tion and look at the RATE parameter and move the pedal You should see the value changing

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 72: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

72

Step 5 You now must store your changes If you have made any changes to any parameter the LED abovetheSTOR EbuttonwilllightPr esstheSTOR Ebuttontosavethechangesy ouhavemad eSTOR EATPR ESETwillflashinter mittently withthecur r entpr esetIfy ouwould like to save this change to the current preset press the STORE button again To save this ad-justed pr eset(and thepar ameter sy ouhavejustchanged )toad iffer entpr esetlocation usethePRESET SELECT knob to choose the preset destination and then press the STORE button againN otethatd oingthiswillover -wr itethepr esetlocationy ouar esavingto

NOTE To exit Pedal Controllers at any time or cancel any changes you have made turn either the PRESET or FUNCTION SELECT knob The word CANCEL will flash on the display and then return you to the preset you were working on

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

S T O R E A T P R E S E T

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

c a n c e l

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

3 7 f l a - D L Y - R E V

8 Pedal Statuscontinued

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 73: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

73

Step 1 To access the FOOT SW MAPPING function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise toFOOTSWMAPPIN G

TheFOOTSWMAPPIN Gfunctionallowsy outoselectwhateffectwillbeused inthe2N DFUNCTION MODE when accessing the EFFECT ONOFF (Second Function button number 1)

EFFECT ONOFF - turns on or off the assigned effect to that footswitch either Bypass Toggle Solo Compr essor Mod ulationEffect Delay R ever bInputor Tr u-By pass(onemustbesetampstor ed intheFootswitch Mapping Function) Bypass Effect bypass - turns on or off all the effects and bypasses them completely

Toggle Channel Toggle - allows you to toggle between two dif-ferent channels (for ex ample between Clean and MEGA)

SOLO Solo Boost - allows a 4db boost in output ideal to get a boost when soloing

Compressor Turns on and off the Compressor within the preset

MODEFX Tur nswhatever Mod ulationEffect(Chor us PitchShift Flanger Tr emolo)y ou have assigned on or off

Delay Turns on and off the Delay within the preset

Reverb Input Turns on and off the Reverb (Active or Muted)

TBypass Tru-Bypass - turns on and off the effects and preamp and allows the signal to pass through the G200B unaffected

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping)

F o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 b y p a s s

2 35 64 1

Step 2 Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select Bypass Toggle Solo Compressor Modula-tion Effect (either Chorus Flanger Pitch Shift or Tremolo) TBypass (Tru-Bypass)

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 s o l o

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 74: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

74

8 Foot SW Mapping (Footswitch Mapping) continued

Step 4 Use the PARAMETER SELECT knob to access the TOGGLE channel selectionfor either Clean Texas British Mega or Scorch

Step 3 Turn the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select TOGGLE

Step 5 To pick the desired Channel you want to change to when TOGGLE is performed use the PARAMETER ADJUST control to make your selection

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e c l e a n

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

e f x 1 t o g g l e

Step 6 Press the STORE button to save the changes You now have assigned a function to the EFFECTON OFFfootswitch1Ify ouwould liketoselectad iffer enteffectfor thisswitchsimply follow the same steps above but choose a different effect

f o o t s w m a p p i n g

t o g g l e m e g a

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 75: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

75

32 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The Factory Restore function allows you to restore presets 1-64 that you may have altered to their original condition as shipped from the factory Either the entire UTOPIA G200B memory can be re-stored or a single preset can be restored Note that you do NOT need to restore presets 65 to 128 as these are factory preset that can not be altered and stored

8 Factory Restore

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

Pr esstheSTOR Ebuttontor estor ethepr esetThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDand return to the preset name page

Restoring a single factory preset

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknobonestepclockwisetoR ESTR 1TO1Thenumber on the left is the original factory preset number to be restored The number on the right is the preset location that the preset will be stored into

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

Factory preset to be restored

Current Presetlocation

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t r 1 t o 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

b 0 0 u t o p i a r o c k s

1 p s h - d l y - r e v

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 76: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

76

Step 3

3 4 12

Step 1

Step 2

Step 4 Press the STORE button at this time to initiate the All Restore procedure and erase pr esets1-128 r eplacingthemwiththeor iginalfactor y pr esetsThed isplay willflashR ESTOR EDastheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y isr estor ed

CAUTION This procedure will permanently erase all presets (1-128) and replace them with the original

factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase do not perform the following procedure

8 Restoring all factory presets

Tur nthePAR AMETER SELECTknob2stepsclockwisetoALLR ESTOR E0

Aspecificcod enumber mustbeenter ed tor estor etheUTOPIAG200Bmemor y Use thePAR AMETER ADJUSTknobtoenter thenumber 22

Tur ntheFUN CTION SELECTknobclockwisetoFACTOR Y R ESTOR E

WARNING Pressing the STORE button at this time will permanently erase all user presets and replace

them with the original factory presets If you have altered and stored presets which you do not want to erase turn the FUNCTION SELECT control to exit this function

The display will return to Preset 1

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 0

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

r e s t o r e d

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

f a c t o r y r e s t o r e

A L L R E S T O R E 2 2

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 77: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

77

8 Title Edit Function

3 524 1

To begin the Title Edit function turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob clockwise until theUTOPIAG200Bd isplay sTITLEEDIT

Step 1

Turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob clockwise to initiate the Title Edit mode Turning this knob will also select the character above the part of the current title to be ed ited Theletter tobead justed willhaveaflashingboxover thechar acter selected

Step 2

Use the PARAMETER ADJUST knob to select the desired character for the current position(flashingbox)

Step 3

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 s w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r w e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 78: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

78

To edit the next character in the next position turn the PARAMETER SELECT knob onestepclockwiseTheflashingboxwillmovetothenextchar acter tobead justed

Step 4

NOTE The STORE button must be pressed to save the new title Exiting the Title Edit func-tion before pressing the STORE button will erase any editing that was done in Title Edit Also after flashing STORED the UTOPIA G200B will exit the title edit mode and return to the main preset number

After all the characters have been edited as needed press the STORE button to save the new title to memory The UTOPIA G200B will flash STORED briefly

Step 5

t i t l e e d i t

b 1 2 r a e e t d r e a m

(Flashing box)

(Letter to be edited)

b 1 2 r a m p a g e

3 7 f l a - d l y - r e v

8 Title Edit continued

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 79: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

79

1 2

Turn the PRESET knob to the preset number you wish to be recalled each time the unit is turned on

Step 2

8 Selecting a Power on Preset

The UTOPIA G200B allows you to store a Power On preset which will always be recalled when the unit is turned on

Step 1

Pr esstheSTOR EbuttonThescr eenwillflashPWR ON PR STOR EDand thenr e-turn to the preset name page

In the above example preset 34 has been saved so that when you turn the UTOPIA G200B on in the future preset 34 will be the preset that is recalled

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

P W R O N P R S T O R E D

B 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

b 1 1 S c o r c h - f r i e d

3 4 f l a - D L Y - R E V

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 80: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

80

Specifications

Maximum Output Level +4 dBu

Output Jacks frac14 Left and Right

Headphone Jack 18 Stereo (Load Impedance 32 Ohm Min)

Important Listening to any sounds at levels above 85 dBu may cause hearing damage Due to high output capabilities present in the HEADPHONE OUTPUTS it is recom-

mended to only use headphones that have an integrated volume control You may also

set the volume when the display is showing a preset name by turning the PARAMETER

ADJUST control which is mapped directly to the MASTER VOLUME of the G200B

Aux Input Jack 18 Stereo Power Requirements 9VAC 29A min Depending on where you are located in the world you may receive a 2 9A 3A 35A adapter with USA or Euro

style plugs

Dimensions With toe of expression pedal down 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 3 14 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 83mm Tall

With toe of expression pedal up 15 18 Wide x 9 Deep x 4 78 Tall 387mm Wide x 228mm Deep x 124mm Tall

Weight 6lbs 272kg

Input Impedance 1M Ohm

Maximum Input Level 0 dBu Input Jack frac14 mono

9 Specifications

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 81: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

81

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe1 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume2 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume3 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher4 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume5 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume6 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume7 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume8 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume9 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume10 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume11 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume12 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10013 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +414 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON15 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +116 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume17 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1018 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 19 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5020 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10021 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -622 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260023 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On24 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on25 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch26 Stone Wammy Mega Dist wWammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up27 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On28 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP29 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2430 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate31 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up32 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On33 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On34 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On35 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth36 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level37 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level38 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On39 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch40 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On41 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On42 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On43 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 8044 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On45 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch46 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On47 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On48 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +449 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On50 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On51 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On52 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain53 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On54 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On55 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix56 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix57 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth58 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On59 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix60 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on61 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance62 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On63 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On64 Dreamscape Clean with Flanger Flanger Level Full off Full On

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 82: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

82

10 Utopia G200B Preset Listing

Preset Name What it does Pedal Heel Toe65 Utopia Rocks Scorch Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume66 Clean Strat Clean wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume67 Wammy Man British Distortion wDelay Pitch Actual Pitch Octave Higher68 Studio Blues Texas Distortion wReverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume69 Great Tone Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume70 Twinverb Clean with Reverb Volume Zero Volume Full Volume71 Jammin British Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume72 High Dry Mega Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume73 Sweet Stevie Texas Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume74 1969 OK British Distortion Volume Zero Volume Full Volume75 Lead One Mega Distortion wDelay Volume Zero Volume Full Volume76 Rhythm+Boost British Distortion Gain Gain 75 Gain 10077 Liquid Clean Clean with Reverb Volume Chorus Level -64 Chorus Level +478 Compress It Clean wReverb amp Compression Compressor Compressor Off Compressor ON79 Magnum Edge Mega with Delay Delay Level Delay Almost Off Delay Up to +180 Thrash Lord Mega Heavy Volume Zero Volume Full Volume81 Treble Sweep Clean Chorus Treble Treble at 0 Treble at 1082 Phase InampOut Clean Phase Phase Mix Zero Effect Full Effect 83 Trem-Tastic Clean Tremolo wDepth Control Tremolo Depth Tremolo at 0 Tremolo Depth 5084 Gain-O-Matic British DistwGain Control Gain Gain at 25 Gain at 10085 Austin Gold British Dist wReverb Control Reverb Level Zero Reverb Reverb -686 Burning Wah British Distortion wWah Wah Frequency 310 260087 Blue Phase British Distortion wPhaser Volume Full off Full On88 Monster Axe Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Volume Full off Full on89 Boomer Mega Distortion wPitch Shift Pitch -1200 1 OctDown = to the played pitch90 Stone Wammy Mega Dist w Wammy Effect Pitch = to played Pitch 1200 - full Octave Up91 Stereo Dist Mega Dist wStereo Effect Volume Full off Full On92 Bad Cat Mega Dist wWammy Bar Effect PITCH -2400 2 OCTDOWN +1200 FULL OCTAVE UP93 Chorus Rhythm British Dist wChorus Effect Chorus Depth Zero Depth Depth up to 2494 Accelerate Mega Distortion with Tremolo Tremolo Rate Zero Rate 254 Rate95 Pedal Steel Mega Dist wPedal Steel Effect Pitch = to played Pitch +200 1 Step Up96 Neck Pickup Texas with Delay Volume Full off Full On97 X-Long Delay Mega Dist wExtra Long Delay Volume Full off Full On98 ScorchFried Scorch Dist Volume Full off Full On99 ScorchPhase Scorch Dist amp Phaser Phaser Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth100 Add Bottom Mega Dist wPitch Shift Effect Pitch Level -34 Level -1 Level101 Sweet Dream Mega Distortion Flanger Level -60 Level -2 Level102 Wide Open Clean Volume Full off Full On103 Hit the Deck Mega Dist wDelay amp Pitch Shift Pitch Pitch down a step Normal Pitch104 CAVEMAN Mega Dist w a lot of Reverb Decay Reverb Level Full off Full On105 ScorchChorus Scorch Dist wChorus Chorus Level Full off Full On106 ScorchFlange Scorch Dist wFlanger Flanger Level Full off Full On107 SITARATE Clean with Pitch Sitar Effect Reverb Decay ZERO DECAY 80108 Volume Swell Clean with a lot of Reverb Decay Volume Full off Full On109 Wammy Bar Mega Distortion with Pitch Pitch 1 Octave Down = to the played pitch110 Old Organ Clean with Pitch Volume Full off Full On111 Scoop Sweep Mega Distortion Scoop Scoop Off Scoop On112 Make-It-Wet British Distortion Chorus Level Almost Off Chorus Full On +4113 Stack-It-All British Distortion with Delay Delay Level Delay Off Delay Full On114 5th Take Mega Dist wDelayPitch up a 5th Pitch Level Pitch Off Pitch Full On115 Screamin Mega Dist wDelayPitch 1 Oct UP Pitch Level Slightly on Full On116 Up-The-Gain Mega Dist with Delay Gain 30 Gain 100 Gain117 Crunchmaster Texas Dist with Reverb Volume Full off Full On118 Blue Flange British Dist wFlanger Effect Flanger Level Almost Off Full On119 Curvy Tone Mega Dist wPhaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix120 Curvy Clean Clean with Phaser Effect PHA MixDirect No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix121 Choke It Mega Dist wTremolo Effect Tremolo Depth Zero Depth 100 Depth122 Clean Coils Clean Volume Full off Full On123 Edgy Coils Edgy Single Coil Sound wPhaser Phaser Mix No Phaser PhaserDry Equal Mix124 Echo Etude Clean with Delay Volume Full off full on125 Razorrsquos Edge Mega Dist wPhaser Resonator PHA Resonance No Resonance Full Resonance126 Mean Machine Mega Distortion Scooped Volume Full off Full On127 Mind The Gap British Distortion with Reverb Volume Full off Full On128 Test Preset

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 83: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

83

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at

Page 84: MANUAL - Rocktron 1. Introduction UTOPIA G20 0 B PR OVIDES PR OFESSIO N SOUALN D FOR GUITAR Rocktron’s Utopia G200B Professional Guitar System provides an arsenal of tone and ...

84

Rocktron -A Division of GHS Corporation2813 Wilber AvenueBattle Creek MI 49037USARocktron Phone 1-(269)-968-3351Email inforocktroncom

2010-0001Rev 100210

wwwrocktroncomCheck us out on the web at